Pioneer Stereo Receiver VSX 919AH K User Manual

AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL  
RECEIVER  
VSX-1019AH-K  
VSX-919AH-K  
Register your product at  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com (US)  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada)  
·
Protect your new investment  
The details of your purchase will be on file for reference in the event of an  
insurance claim such as loss or theft.  
·
Receive free tips, updates and service bulletins on  
your new product  
·
·
Improve product development  
Your input helps us continue to design products that meet your needs.  
Receive a free Pioneer newsletter  
Registered customers can opt in to receive a monthly newsletter.  
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT  
CAUTION  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
CAUTION:  
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,  
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to  
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated  
"dangerous voltage" within the product's  
enclosure that may be of sufficient  
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric  
shock to persons.  
The exclamation point within an equilateral  
triangle is intended to alert the user to the  
presence of important operating and  
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the  
literature accompanying the appliance.  
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC  
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR  
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS  
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED  
SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A  
1) Read these instructions.  
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the  
manufacturer.  
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or  
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the  
apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when  
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid  
injury from tip-over.  
2) Keep these instructions.  
3) Heed all warnings.  
4) Follow all instructions.  
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.  
6) Clean only with dry cloth.  
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in  
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.  
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as  
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus  
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or  
grounding-type plug.  
A
polarized plug has two  
blades with one wider than the other. A grounding  
type plug has two blades and a third grounding  
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are  
provided for your safety. If the provided plug does  
not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for  
replacement of the obsolete outlet.  
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or  
when unused for long periods of time.  
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been  
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or  
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects  
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has  
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate  
normally, or has been dropped.  
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or  
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience  
receptacles, and the point where they exit from the  
apparatus.  
P1-4-2-2_En  
WARNING  
VENTILATION CAUTION  
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked  
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the  
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space  
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat  
radiation (at least 60 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and  
30 cm at each side).  
equipment.  
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not  
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.  
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect  
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from  
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,  
make sure the unit has been installed so that the  
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC  
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,  
the power cord should also be unplugged from the  
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time  
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for  
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the  
product, and to protect it from overheating. To  
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be  
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,  
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the  
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.  
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En  
Operating Environment  
Operating environment temperature and humidity:  
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH  
(cooling vents not blocked)  
(for example, when on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En  
For U.S. and Australia Model  
CAUTION  
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in  
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or  
strong artificial light)  
To prevent fire hazard, the  
Class 2 Wiring Cable  
should be used for  
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En  
connection with speaker,  
and should be routed  
away from hazards to  
avoid damage to the  
insulation of the cable.  
This product is for general household purposes. Any  
failure due to use for other than household purposes  
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a  
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which  
requires repair will be charged for even during the  
warranty period.  
K041_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate  
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.  
Connecting a component to the front  
panel inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Contents  
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
01 Before you start  
Checking what’s in the box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
04 Basic Setup  
Switching the speaker impedance. . . . . . . . . . 36  
Changing the OSD display language  
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Loading the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
(OSD Language). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(Auto MCACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Problems when using the Auto  
MCACC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
The Input Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Input function default and possible settings . . . 40  
02 Controls and displays  
Front panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Operating range of remote control unit. . . . . 13  
03 Connecting your equipment  
05 Basic playback  
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Determining the speakers’ application . . . . . . 15  
Other speaker connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Placing the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Some tips for improving sound quality . . . . . 17  
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround  
Playing a source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Playing a source with HDMI connection . . . . 42  
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs. . . 42  
Playing an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod . . . 43  
Playing a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Playing back audio files stored on  
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Bi-amping your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Bi-wiring your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Selecting the Surr Back system . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Zone 2 setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Speaker B setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Bi-Amping setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
About the audio connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
About the video converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Connecting your TV and playback  
components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI  
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input . . . 26  
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other  
set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Connecting a HDD/DVD recorder, VCR  
a USB memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Playing back photo files stored on  
a USB memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
About playable file formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Using SIRIUS Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Listening to SIRIUS Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Saving channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Using the SIRIUS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Improving FM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Using Neural THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Saving station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Listening to station presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
06 Listening to your system  
Auto playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . 54  
Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . 55  
Using Stream Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Using surround back channel processing . . . . 56  
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode. . . . . 57  
Setting the Up Mix function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Selecting MCACC presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Better sound using Phase Control. . . . . . . . . . 59  
and other video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . 28  
Connecting other audio components . . . . . . . 29  
About the WMA9 Pro decoder . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Connecting AM/FM antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
MULTI-ZONE setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Making MULTI-ZONE connections . . . . . . . . 31  
Connecting an IR receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Operating other Pioneer components  
with this unit’s sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Connecting your SiriusConnect™ Tuner . . . . . 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
07 KURO LINK  
11 The system and the other setup  
Making the KURO LINK connections . . . . . . . 60  
Cautions on the KURO LINK function. . . . . . 61  
About connections with a product of  
Making receiver settings from  
the System Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Surround back speaker setting. . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Speaker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Speaker Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
ZONE Audio Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Power ON Level Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Volume Limit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Remote Control Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Flicker Reduction Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
a different brand that supports  
the KURO LINK function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
KURO LINK Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Setting the PQLS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Synchronized amp mode operations . . . . . . 63  
Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . 63  
08 Using other functions  
Setting the Audio options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Setting the Video options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Making an audio or a video recording . . . . . . . 70  
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . 71  
Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Checking your system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
12 Additional information  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
No sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical  
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Important information regarding  
09 Controlling the rest of your system  
Operating multiple receivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Setting the remote to control  
other components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Resetting the remote control presets . . . . . . . 74  
Default preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Controls the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
the HDMI connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
SIRIUS radio messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Surround sound formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Dolby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional. . . . . 113  
About iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
About SIRIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
About Neural – THX Surround. . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with  
different input signal formats . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Preset code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Cleaning the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
10 The Advanced MCACC menu  
Making receiver settings from the Advanced  
MCACC menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Fine Channel Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Fine Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional . . . . . . 86  
Checking MCACC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Speaker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Acoustic Cal EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Renaming MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Copying MCACC preset data . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Clearing MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped  
with an abundance of functions and terminals.  
It can be used easily after following the  
procedure below to make the connections and  
settings.  
The colors of the steps indicate the following:  
Required setting item  
Setting to be made as necessary  
MCACC speaker settings  
• Automatically setting up for surround sound  
1
2
Before you start  
• Checking what’s in the box (page 7)  
9
(page 15)  
• 7.1ch surround connection  
• 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping  
connection  
10 The Input Setup menu (page 39)  
(When using connections other than the  
recommended connections)  
3
4
Connecting the speakers  
quality as desired  
• Using the various listening modes  
• Using surround back channel processing  
(page 56)  
• Better sound using Phase Control (page 59)  
• Switches on/off the Acoustic Calibration  
EQ, Sound retriever or Dialog Enhancement  
(page 64)  
• Placing the speakers (page 17)  
• Connecting the speakers (page 18)  
connections (page 19)  
• Bi-amping your speakers (page 20)  
Connecting the components  
• About the audio connection (page 22)  
• About the video converter (page 22)  
• Connecting your TV and playback  
components (page 23)  
• Connecting AM/FM antennas (page 30)  
• Plugging in the receiver (page 35)  
• Change the channel level while listening  
(Tip on page 97)  
• Measure the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL  
• Setting the PQLS function (page 62)  
• Setting the Audio options (Tone, Loudness  
or Sound delay, etc.) (page 64)  
5
Switching the speaker impedance  
(page 36)  
(Only if the impedance of the connected  
speakers is 6 to 8 )  
13 Other optional adjustments and  
settings  
• KURO LINK Setup (page 62)  
Power On  
• The Advanced MCACC menu (page 77)  
• The system and the other setup (page 93)  
6
7
Changing the OSD display language  
(OSD Language) (page 36)  
14 Making maximum use of the remote  
control  
• Operating multiple receivers (page 73)  
• Setting the remote to control other  
components (page 73)  
8
Surround back speaker setting (page  
94)  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Chapter 1:  
Before you start  
Checking what’s in the box  
Loading the batteries  
Please check that you’ve received the following  
supplied accessories:  
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.))  
• Remote control unit  
• AA size IEC R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm  
system operation) x2  
CAUTION  
• AM loop antenna  
• FM wire antenna  
• iPod cable  
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such  
hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the  
following precautions:  
• These operating instructions  
• Never use new and old batteries together.  
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the  
batteries properly according to the marks  
in the battery case.  
Installing the receiver  
• When installing this unit, make sure to put  
it on a level and stable surface.  
• Batteries with the same shape may have  
different voltages. Do not use different  
batteries together.  
Don’t install it on the following places:  
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)  
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that  
gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere  
with the sound.  
• When disposing of used batteries, please  
comply with governmental regulations or  
environmental public instruction’s rules  
that apply in your country or area.  
– in direct sunlight  
– in damp or wet areas  
WARNING  
– in extremely hot or cold areas  
– in places where there is vibration or other  
movement  
– in places that are very dusty  
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as  
a kitchen)  
Do not use or store batteries in direct  
sunlight or other excessively hot place,  
such as inside a car or near a heater. This  
can cause batteries to leak, overheat,  
explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the  
life or performance of batteries.  
• Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel  
while the power is turned on. The bottom  
panel gets hot when the power is on, and  
touching it could cause burns.  
(Symbol examples for batteries)  
These symbols are only valid  
in the European Union.  
K058c_A1_En  
Pb  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
02  
Controls and displays  
Chapter 2:  
Controls and displays  
Front panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER  
STANDBY/ON  
ENTER  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
ADVANCED  
MCACC  
BAND  
TUNE  
TUNE  
HDMI  
PRESET  
PRESET  
TUNER EDIT  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
MULTI-ZONE  
AUTO SURR/ALC/  
STREAM DIRECT  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
STEREO  
SPEAKERS  
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
iPod  
iPhone  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
USB  
VIDEO  
L
R
PHONES  
9
10  
11 12  
4
13  
14  
1
INPUT SELECTOR dial  
Use to select an input function.  
PHASE CONTROL indicator  
indicate Phase Control is selected  
(page 59)  
Lights to  
.
2
STANDBY/ON  
ADVANCED MCACC indicator – Lights  
when EQ is set to ON in the AUDIO  
PARAMETER menu.  
Switches the receiver between on and standby.  
Power indicator lights when the receiver is on.  
When the KURO LINK function is set to ON,  
the power indicator lights dimly when the  
power is in standby.  
HDMI indicator – Blinks when connecting  
an HDMI-equipped component; lights when  
the component is connected (page 23)  
.
3
Tuner controls  
5
Character display  
BAND – Switches between AM and FM  
radio bands (page 51).  
See Display on page 9.  
TUNE +/– – Use to find radio frequencies  
(page 51).  
PRESET +/– – Use to find preset stations  
(page 52).  
6
ENTER  
7
Remote sensor  
Receives the signals from the remote control  
(see Operating range of remote control unit on  
page 13).  
TUNER EDIT Use with TUNE +/–  
+/– and ENTER to memorize and name  
stations for recall (page 52)  
,
PRESET  
8
MASTER VOLUME dial  
.
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
9
PHONES jack  
11 SPEAKERS  
Use to connect headphones. When the  
headphones are connected, there is no sound  
Use to change the speaker system (page 69).  
12 MULTI-ZONE controls  
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see  
MULTI-ZONE setup on page 31) use these  
controls to control the sub zone from the main  
zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on  
page 69).  
10 Listening mode buttons  
AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT –  
Switches between Auto Surround (page 53)  
Auto level control mode and Stream Direct  
,
mode (page 56)  
.
13 iPod/iPhone/USB  
,
VIDEO INPUT  
STEREO – Switches between stereo  
playback, and Front Stage Surround  
Advance modes (page 55).  
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch  
between the various surround modes  
(page 54).  
terminals  
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio  
and video source, or connect a USB device for  
audio and photo playback (page 34, 35).  
See Connecting a component to the front panel  
inputs on page 34.  
STANDARD SURROUND – Press for  
Standard decoding and to switch between  
the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and Neo:6  
options (page 53).  
14 MCACC SETUP MIC jack  
Use to connect the supplied microphone  
(page 37).  
Display  
1
2
3
45  
6
7
8
9
10 11 12  
13 14  
TUNED  
15  
16 17  
2
DIGITAL PLUS  
2
TrueHD WMA9Pro MULTI-ZONE PQLS ALC ATT STEREO  
DTS HD ES 96/24  
DSD PCM  
AUTO  
PCM  
HDMI  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
L
C
R
SL  
SR  
S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER  
MONO  
dB  
XL XC XR  
TV  
DVD  
BD DVR  
SIRIUS  
iPod  
VIDEO  
HDMI  
CD TUNER  
CD-R  
USB  
[ 2 ] [ 3 ]  
MSTR  
LFE  
[ 4 ]  
AUTO SURROUND  
STREAM DIRECT  
2
PROLOGIC  
x
ADV.SURROUND  
Neo:6  
STEREO STANDARD  
SP AB  
SLEEP  
10  
18  
19 20 21  
22  
23  
L/R – Left front/Right front channel  
C – Center channel  
1
SIGNAL indicators  
Light to indicate the currently selected input  
signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to  
select the input signal automatically (page 58).  
SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround channel  
LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( ))  
indicators light when an LFE signal is being input)  
XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones above  
XC – Either one channel other than the ones above,  
the mono surround channel or matrix encode flag  
2
Program format indicators  
Light to indicate the channels being input  
when PCM signals are being input. They do not  
indicate the audio signals being output from  
the receiver.  
3
Digital format indicators  
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding  
format is detected.  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
02  
Controls and displays  
4
S.RTRV  
13 Tuner indicators  
Lights when the Sound Retriever function is  
active (page 65)  
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being  
received.  
.
STEREO Lights when a stereo FM broadcast  
is being received in auto stereo mode.  
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set  
5
MULTI-ZONE  
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active  
(page 69).  
using MPX  
.
6
DSD PCM Light during DSD (Direct Stream  
Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs.  
PCM – Lights during playback of PCM  
signals.  
14  
Lights when the sound is muted (page 13).  
15 Master volume level  
7
SOUND  
Shows the overall volume level.  
indicates the maximum level.  
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or  
tone controls feature is selected (page 64).  
Lights when Dialog Enhancement is switched on.  
16 Input function indicators  
Light to indicate the input function you have  
selected.  
8
PQLS  
Lights when the PQLS feature is active (page 62)  
.
.
9
UP MIX  
17 Scroll indicators  
Light when there are more selectable items  
when making the various settings.  
Lights when the UP Mix is switched on (page 57)  
10 Listening mode indicators  
AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto  
Surround feature is switched on (page 53).  
18 Matrix decoding format indicators  
2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate  
2 Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding  
(page 53).  
ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level  
control) mode is selected (page 56).  
Neo:6 When one of the Neo:6 modes of the  
receiver is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6  
STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/  
Pure Direct is selected (page 56).  
processing (page 53)  
.
ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of the  
Advanced Surround modes has been  
selected (page 54).  
19 Speaker indicators  
Lights to indicate the current speaker system,  
A and/or B (page 69).  
STEREO – Lights when stereo listening is  
switched on (page 55).  
20 SLEEP  
STANDARD – Lights when one of the  
Standard Surround modes is switched on  
(page 53).  
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 71)  
.
21 MSTR  
Lights during playback of DTS-HD Master  
Audio signal.  
11  
(PHASE CONTROL)  
Lights when the Phase Control is switched on  
(page 59).  
22 Character display  
Displays various system information.  
12 Analog signal indicators  
23 Remote control mode indicator  
Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control  
mode setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.)  
(page 73)  
Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog  
signal (page 71)  
.
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
Remote control  
02  
The remote has been conveniently color-coded  
according to component control using the  
following system:  
12  
13  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
White – Receiver control, TV Control  
1
2
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
HDMI  
Blue – Other controls  
CD-R  
VIDEO  
1
RECEIVER  
This switches between standby and on for this  
receiver.  
iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS  
INPUT  
SELECT  
2
Input function buttons  
1
2
3
Press to select control of other components (see  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
4
5
6
Controlling the rest of your system on page 73).  
3
4
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
7
8
9
3
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
component controls  
ENTER  
0
INPUT  
Use the number buttons to directly select a  
radio frequency (page 51) or the tracks on a  
CD, DVD, etc.  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
14  
15  
TV CONTROL  
ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV  
or DTV.  
CH  
VOL  
MUTE  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
Press  
first to access:  
RECEIVER  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
5
6
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
INPUT SELECT – Use to select the input  
function (page 41).  
PRESET  
ENTER  
PRESET  
RETURN  
SIGNAL SEL Use to select an input signal  
(page 58).  
CATEGORY  
HOME  
MENU  
iPod CTRL  
TUNE  
presets (page 58).  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep  
mode and select the amount of time before  
sleep (page 71).  
7
8
HDD  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
SBch Use to select the surround back/virtual  
surround back channel mode (page 56)  
.
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
9
A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an  
analog input signal to prevent distortion  
(page 71).  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
10  
16  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display  
(page 71).  
11  
MAIN  
ZONE 2  
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a  
channel, then use / to adjust the level  
(page 97).  
RECEIVER  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
02  
Controls and displays  
Press TUNER first to access:  
6
/// (TUNE/PRESET) /ENTER  
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your  
surround sound system (see page 77) and the  
Audio or Video options (page 64 or 67). Also  
used to control DVD menus/options and for  
deck 1 of a double cassette deck player. Use  
TUNE/ to find radio frequencies and use  
PRESET / to find preset stations (page 52).  
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can  
access a radio station directly using the  
number buttons (page 51).  
CLASS – Switches between the seven  
banks (classes) of radio station presets  
(page 52).  
4
TV CONTROL buttons  
7
Receiver controls  
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV  
assigned to TV operation selector switch. Thus  
if you only have one TV to hook up to this  
system assign it to the TV operation selector  
switch (see page 75 for more on this).  
Press first to access:  
RECEIVER  
AUTO/ALC/DIRECT Switches between  
Auto Surround (page 53), Auto level control  
mode and Stream Direct mode (page 56).  
STEREO – Switches between stereo  
playback, and Front Stage Surround  
Advance modes (page 55).  
– Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.  
INPUT – Use to select the TV input signal.  
CH +/– – Use to select channels.  
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding  
and to switch between the various 2 Pro  
Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 53).  
VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your  
TV.  
5
Tuner/componentcontrolbuttons/HOME  
ADV SURR – Use to switch between the  
various surround modes (page 54).  
MENU  
These button controls can be accessed after  
you have selected the corresponding input  
function button (DVD, DVR, TV, etc.). The  
BAND and T.EDIT tuner controls are explained  
on page 51 and page 52.  
8
Component control buttons  
The main buttons (, , etc.) are used to  
control a component after you have selected it  
using the input function buttons.  
The controls above these buttons can be  
accessed after you have selected the  
corresponding input function button (for  
example DVD, DVR or TV). These buttons also  
function as described below.  
Press  
first to access:  
RECEIVER  
AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the  
Audio options (page 64).  
VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the  
Video options (page 67).  
Press TV first to access:  
HOME MENU – Use to access the Home  
Menu (pages 36, 39, 62, 77, 93 and 98).  
ANT – Use to select the VHF/UHF antennas  
or Cable TV.  
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the  
current menu screen (also use to return to  
the previous menu with DVDs or to select  
closed captioning with DTV).  
Press TUNER first to access:  
MPX – Switches between stereo and mono  
reception of FM broadcasts. If the signal is  
weak, then switching to mono will improve  
the sound quality (page 51).  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
02  
Operating range of remote control  
unit  
The remote control may not work properly if:  
Press  
first to access:  
RECEIVER  
PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off  
Phase Control (page 59).  
• There are obstacles between the remote  
control and the receiver’s remote sensor.  
STATUS – Press to check selected receiver  
settings (page 71).  
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is  
9
AUDIO – Changes the audio or channel on  
DVD discs.  
DISPLAY – Switches between named  
station presets and radio frequencies.  
• The receiver is located near a device that is  
emitting infrared rays.  
• The receiver is operated simultaneously  
with another infrared remote control unit.  
CH +/– – Use to select channels for DVD/  
DVR units.  
10 REMOTE SETUP – Use to input the preset  
code when making remote control settings  
and to set the remote control mode  
(page 73).  
TV CTRL – Use this button to set preset  
code of your TV’s manufacturer when  
controlling TV (see Selecting preset codes  
directly on page 73 for more on this).  
30°  
30°  
11 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch  
Switch to perform operations in the main zone  
and sub zone (page 70).  
7 m (23 ft.)  
12 Remote control LED  
Lights when a command is sent from the  
remote control (page 73).  
13 SOURCE  
Press to turn on/off other components  
connected to the receiver (see page 73 for  
more on this).  
14 MASTER VOLUME +/–  
Use to set the listening volume.  
15 MUTE  
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has  
been muted (adjusting the volume also  
restores the sound).  
16 RECEIVER  
Switches the remote to control the receiver  
(used to select the white commands above the  
number buttons (A.ATT, etc.)). Also use this  
button to set up surround sound.  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
03  
Connecting your equipment  
Chapter 3:  
Connecting your equipment  
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This  
page explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.  
Rear panel  
VSX-919AH  
DIGITAL  
HDMI  
AUDIO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
2
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(
)
1
2
IN DVD  
BD IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
AUDIO  
FRONT  
VSX-1019AH  
L
Y
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN TV/SAT  
SIRIUS IN  
AM  
ASSIGNABLE  
LOOP  
1
(
)
2
(
)
1
(
)
2
(
)
1
2
3
IN DVD IN CD  
IN DVR  
BD IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
Y
AUDIO  
L
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND  
PRE OUT  
Y
FM  
UNBAL  
75  
PB  
PB  
R
SUBWOOFER  
MULTI CH IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
DVR  
AUX  
IN  
CD  
IN  
CD-R  
SUBWOOFER  
ANTENNA  
B L  
SURROUND BACK/  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
P
IN  
DVD  
R
PR  
1
2
IN  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
L
R
L
R
CENTER  
SURROUND  
(
)
(
)
A
(
)
DVR  
R
Single  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
Y
IR  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
P
B
CON-  
TROL  
PR  
OUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
Important  
CAUTION  
• Before making or changing the  
connections, switch off the power and  
disconnect the power cord from the power  
outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.  
• Illustration shows the VSX-1019AH,  
however connections for the VSX-919AH  
are the same except where noted.  
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables  
over the top of the receiver.  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting your equipment  
03  
[2] 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping  
connection (High quality surround)  
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for  
high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround  
sound.  
Determining the speakers’  
application  
Surround sound with a strong sense of  
presence can be enjoyed by connecting 7  
speakers and 1 subwoofer. It is also possible to  
achieve high sound quality using bi-amp  
connections and to enjoy music in other rooms  
using the MULTI-ZONE feature. High sound  
quality can be achieved with a minimum of two  
speakers.  
Surr Back System setting: Front Bi-Amp  
FL  
Front  
left*  
SW  
FR  
Front  
right*  
C
Center  
Subwoofer  
• Be sure to connect speakers to the front  
FR  
left and right channels ( FL and  
).  
Surround  
right  
Surround  
left  
• The Surr Back System setting must be  
made if you use any of the connections  
shown below other than [1] (see Selecting  
the Surr Back system on page 21).  
SR  
SL  
*Bi-amp compatible speaker  
[3] 5.1ch surround & Zone 2 connection  
(Multi Zone)  
With these connections you can simultaneously  
enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main  
zone with stereo playback on another  
component in Zone 2. (The selection of input  
devices is limited.)  
[1] 7.1ch surround connection  
(Simple connection & Best surround)  
*Default setting  
These connections prioritize surround sound  
with a speaker layout like that in a movie theater.  
Surr Back System setting: Normal  
(default)  
Surr Back System setting: Zone2  
• If you have six speakers, either only  
connect one surround back speaker (6.1 ch  
surround), or connect for the 7.1-channel  
setting as shown on the diagram below but  
without the center speaker.  
FL  
Front  
left  
SW  
FR  
Front  
right  
C
Center  
Subwoofer  
FL  
Front  
left  
SW  
FR  
Front  
right  
Surround  
right  
Surround  
left  
C
Center  
SR  
SL  
Subwoofer  
SR  
SL  
Surround  
left  
Surround  
right  
L
Left  
R
Right  
SBL  
SBR  
Surround  
back left  
Surround  
back right  
ZONE2  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
03  
Connecting your equipment  
[4] 5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection  
With these connections you can  
simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround  
sound in the main zone with stereo playback of  
the same sound on the B speakers.  
Other speaker connection  
• Your favorite speaker connections can be  
selected even if you have fewer than 5.1  
speakers.  
• When not connecting a subwoofer, connect  
speakers with low frequency reproduction  
capabilities to the front channel. (The  
subwoofer’s low frequency component is  
played from the front speakers, so the  
speakers could be damaged.)  
Surr Back System setting: Speaker B  
FL  
Front  
left  
SW  
FR  
Front  
right  
C
Center  
• After connecting, be sure to conduct  
the Auto MCACC (speaker environment  
setting) procedure (page 37).  
Subwoofer  
Surround  
right  
Surround  
left  
SR  
SL  
Speaker B  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Placing the speakers  
03  
Some tips for improving sound quality  
Where you put your speakers in the room has a  
big effect on the quality of the sound. The  
following guidelines should help you to get the  
best sound from your system.  
To achieve the best possible surround sound,  
install your speakers as shown below.  
5.1 channel surround system:  
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor.  
Ideally, the other speakers should be at  
about ear-level when you’re listening to  
them. Putting the speakers on the floor  
(except the subwoofer), or mounting them  
very high on a wall is not recommended.  
Center  
Front right  
Front left  
Subwoofer  
120°  
120°  
• For the best stereo effect, place the front  
speakers 2 m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) apart, at  
equal distance from the TV.  
Surround  
right  
Surround  
left  
• If you’re using a center speaker, place the  
front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place  
them at a narrower angle.  
6.1 channel surround system:  
• Place the center speaker above or below  
the TV so that the sound of the center  
channel is localized at the TV screen. Also,  
make sure the center speaker does not  
cross the line formed by the leading edge  
of the front left and right speakers.  
Center  
Front left  
Front right  
Subwoofer  
120°  
120°  
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the  
listening position. The angle depends on  
the size of the room. Use less of an angle  
for bigger rooms.  
Surround  
left  
Surround  
right  
Surround Back  
• Surround and surround back speakers  
should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm (2 ft.  
to 3 ft.) higher than your ears and tilted  
slight downward. Make sure the speakers  
don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the  
speakers should be more directly behind  
the listener than for home theater playback.  
7.1 channel surround system:  
Center  
Front left  
Front right  
Subwoofer  
• If the surround speakers cannot be set  
directly to the side of the listening position  
with a 7.1-channel system, the surround  
effect can be enhanced by turning off the  
UP Mix function (see Setting the Up Mix  
function on page 57).  
90°  
90°  
Surround  
left  
Surround  
right  
60°  
Surround back  
left  
Surround back  
right  
• Try not to place the surround speakers  
farther away from the listening position  
than the front and center speakers. Doing  
so can weaken the surround sound effect.  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
03  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting the speakers  
Important  
• Please refer to the manual that came with  
your speakers for details on how to connect  
the other end of the speaker cables to your  
speakers.  
Each speaker connection on the receiver  
comprises a positive (+) and negative (–)  
terminal. Make sure to match these up with the  
terminals on the speakers themselves.  
• Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer.  
It is not possible to connect using speaker  
cables.  
CAUTION  
• These speaker terminals carry  
HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage. To prevent  
the risk of electric shock when connecting  
or disconnecting the speaker cables,  
disconnect the power cord before touching  
any uninsulated parts.  
CAUTION  
• Make sure that all speakers are securely  
installed. This not only improves sound  
quality, but also reduces the risk of  
damage or injury resulting from speakers  
being knocked over or falling in the event of  
external shocks such as earthquakes.  
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is  
twisted together and inserted fully into the  
speaker terminal. If any of the bare speaker  
wire touches the back panel it may cause  
the power to cut off as a safety measure.  
Bare wire connections  
1
Twist exposed wire strands together.  
(fig. A)  
2
Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire.  
(fig. B)  
3
Tighten terminal. (fig. C)  
fig. A  
fig. B  
fig. C  
10 mm (3/8 in.)  
Banana plug connections  
If you want to use speaker cables terminated  
with banana plugs, screw the speaker terminal  
fully shut, then plug the banana plug into the  
end of the speaker terminal.  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting your equipment  
Installing your speaker system  
03  
At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround  
speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back  
speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal).  
Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections  
Subwoofer  
Center  
Front right  
Front left  
LINE LEVEL  
INPUT  
VSX-1019AH  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN TV/SAT  
SIRIUS IN  
AM  
ASSIGNABLE  
LOOP  
1
(
)
2
(
)
1
(
)
2
(
)
1
2
3
IN DVD IN CD  
IN DVR  
BD IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
Y
AUDIO  
L
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND  
PRE OUT  
Y
FM  
UNBAL  
75  
PB  
PB  
R
SUBWOOFER  
MULTI CH IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
DVR  
AUX  
IN  
CD  
IN  
CD-R  
SUBWOOFER  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
P
IN  
DVD  
R
PR  
2
DVR  
1
SPEAKERS  
IN  
B
L
FRONT  
L
CENTER  
R
SURROUND  
L
R
SURROUND BACK/  
(
)
(
)
A
(
)
R
Single  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
Y
IR  
OUT  
VIDEO  
PB  
IN  
CON-  
TROL  
PR  
OUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
The surround back terminals can also be  
used for the Speaker B and Zone 2.  
7.1 ch surround setting  
Surround back left  
Surround back right  
6.1 ch surround setting  
Surround back  
No connect  
Speaker B setting  
Speaker B - Left  
Speaker B - Right  
Surround left  
Surround right  
Zone 2 setting  
Zone 2 - Left  
Zone 2 - Right  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
03  
Connecting your equipment  
Bi-amping your speakers  
Bi-amp compatible  
Bi-amp compatible  
speaker  
speaker  
Center  
Subwoofer  
High  
Low  
High  
Low  
Front right  
Front left  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
COAXIAL  
SIRIUS IN  
AM  
ASSIGNABLE  
LOOP  
1
(
)
2
(
)
1
(
)
2
(
)
1
2
3
IN DVD IN CD  
IN TV/SAT  
IN DVR  
BD IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
Y
AUDIO  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND  
PRE OUT  
L
Y
FM  
UNBAL  
75  
PB  
PB  
R
SUBWOOFER  
MULTI CH IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
DVR  
AUX  
IN  
CD  
IN  
CD-R  
SUBWOOFER  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
P
IN  
DVD  
R
PR  
2
DVR  
1
SPEAKERS  
IN  
B
L
FRONT  
L
CENTER  
R
SURROUND  
L
R
SURROUND BACK/  
(
)
(
)
A
(
)
R
Single  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IR  
IN  
Y
OUT  
IN  
CON-  
TROL  
VIDEO  
P
B
PR  
OUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
VSX-1019AH  
Surround right  
Surround left  
Bi-amping is when you connect the high  
frequency driver and low frequency driver of  
your speakers to different amplifiers for better  
crossover performance. Your speakers must be  
bi-ampable to do this (having separate  
terminals for high and low) and the sound  
improvement will depend on the kind of  
speakers you’re using.  
Bi-wiring your speakers  
Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they  
support bi-amping.  
• With these connections, the Surr Back  
System setting makes no difference.  
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker  
cables to the speaker terminal on the receiver.  
Using a banana plug for the second  
connection is recommended.  
CAUTION  
• Most speakers with both High and Low  
terminals have two metal plates that  
connect the High to the Low terminals.  
These must be removed when you are bi-  
amping the speakers or you could severely  
damage the amplifier. See your speaker  
manual for more information.  
• If your speakers have a removable  
crossover network, make sure you do not  
remove it for bi-amping. Doing so may  
damage your speakers.  
CAUTION  
• Don’t connect different speakers from the  
same terminal in this way.  
• When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions  
for bi-amping shown at the left.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting your equipment  
Selecting the Surr Back system  
03  
2
Select the ‘Front Bi-Amp’ setting from  
the ‘Surr Back System’ menu.  
to do this.  
The surround back terminals can be used for  
in addition to for the surround back speakers.  
Make this setting according to the application.  
Zone 2 setup  
With these connections you can  
simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround  
sound in the main zone with stereo playback  
on another component in Zone 2.  
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the surround  
back speaker terminals.  
See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround  
connections on page 19.  
2
Select ‘ZONE 2’ from the Surr Back  
System menu.  
See Surround back speaker setting on page 94  
to do this.  
Speaker B setup  
You can listen to stereo playback in another  
room.  
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the surround  
back speaker terminals.  
See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround  
connections on page 19.  
2
Select ‘Speaker B’ from the Surr Back  
System menu.  
See Surround back speaker setting on page 94  
to do this.  
Bi-Amping setup  
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for  
high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround  
sound.  
1
Connect a Bi-amp compatible speakers to  
the front and surround back speaker  
terminals.  
See Bi-amping your speakers on page 20.  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
03  
Connecting your equipment  
About the audio connection  
About the video converter  
There are several types of audio input and  
output terminals on this receiver. The receiver  
selects the first available signal in the following  
order:  
The video converter ensures that all video  
sources are output through all of the  
MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks. The only  
exception is HDMI: since this resolution  
cannot be downsampled, you must connect  
your monitor/TV to the receiver’s HDMI video  
Types of cables and  
terminals  
Transferable  
audio signals  
1
outputs when connecting this video source.  
HDMI  
HD audio  
If several video components are assigned to  
the same input function (see The Input Setup  
menu on page 39), the converter gives priority  
to HDMI, component, then composite (in that  
order).  
Digital (Coaxial)  
Digital (Optical)  
Conventional  
digital audio  
Terminal for  
connection with  
source device  
Terminal for  
connection with TV  
monitor  
HDMI IN  
HDMI OUT  
RCA (Analog)  
(White/Red)  
Conventional  
analog audio  
P
R
PR  
PB  
Y
PB  
Y
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
VIDEO IN  
• With an HDMI cable, video and audio  
signals can be transferred in high quality  
over a single cable.  
Video signals can be output  
This product incorporates copyright protection  
technology that is protected by method claims of certain  
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned  
by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners.  
Use of this copyright protection technology must be  
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended  
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless  
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
CAUTION  
• When connecting optical cables, be careful  
when inserting the plug not to damage the  
shutter protecting the optical socket.  
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely.  
The cable may be damaged if bent around  
sharp corners.  
Note  
1 • If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat panel TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your  
component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be  
converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 67) OFF.  
• The signal input resolutions that can be converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 480i/  
576i, 480p/576p, 720p and 1080i. 1080p signals cannot be converted.  
• Only signals with an input resolution of 480i/576i can be converted from the component video input for the  
composite monitor output.  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting your TV and playback components  
Connecting using HDMI  
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray disc player, etc.), you can  
connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.  
If the TV and playback components support the Pioneer KURO LINK feature, the convenient KURO  
LINK functions can be used (see KURO LINK on page 60).  
VSX-1019AH  
DIGITAL  
HDMI  
AUDIO  
IGNABLE  
1
3
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(TV/SAT)  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
2
(
)
IN DVR  
(
)
IN DVD  
IN CD IN  
2
(
)
1
2
3
1
1
IN  
IN  
OUT  
BD IN  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
Y
AUDI
FRONT CENTESURROUND  
PRE OUT  
L
PB  
R
SUBWO
MULTI CH IN  
ZON
OU
DVD  
IN  
DVR  
AUX  
IN  
CD  
IN  
CD-R  
SUBWOOFER  
TV/SAT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
P
IN  
DVD  
R
PR  
2
DVR  
1
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
IN  
L
CENTER  
R
SURROUND  
L
(
)
(
)
A
R
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
IR  
Y
OUT  
VIDEO  
PB  
IN  
CON-  
TROL  
PR  
OUT  
This connection is  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
required in order to  
listen to the sound of  
the TV over the receiver.  
R
L
ANALOG  
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
HDMI IN  
Select one  
HDMI OUT  
HDMI OUT  
Other HDMI/DVI-  
equipped component  
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor  
or flat panel TV  
HDMI/DVI-compatible  
Blu-ray disc player  
• When connecting a Blu-ray disc player,  
connect the player to the receiver’s BD IN  
terminal.  
• For input components, connections other  
than HDMI connections are also possible  
(see Connecting your DVD player with no  
HDMI output on page 25).  
• The HDMI indicator lights on the front  
panel when an HDMI-equipped  
component is connected.  
• If your Blu-ray disc player offers multi-  
channel analog audio outputs, see  
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs  
on page 28.  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
03  
Connecting your equipment  
• The sound of the TV cannot be heard over  
the receiver if the TV is connected using an  
HDMI cable.  
• Synchronized operation with components  
using the KURO LINK function (see KURO  
LINK on page 60)  
If you want to listen to the sound of the TV  
over the receiver, connect the receiver and  
TV with audio cables.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.  
1
“x.v.Color” and x.v.Color logo are trademarks of  
Sony Corporation.  
About HDMI  
The HDMI connection transfers  
uncompressed digital video, as well as almost  
every kind of digital audio that the connected  
component is compatible with, including DVD-  
Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus,  
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see  
below for limitations), Video CD/Super VCD  
and CD. See About the video converter on  
page 22 for more on HDMI compatibility.  
This receiver incorporates High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface (HDMI™) technology.  
This receiver supports the functions described  
below through HDMI connections.  
• Digital transfer of uncompressed video  
(contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24,  
1080p/60, etc.))  
2
• DeepColor signal transfer  
2
• x.v.Color signal transfer  
• Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital  
audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8  
channels  
• Input of the following digital audio formats:  
– Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS,  
High bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD  
Master Audio), DVD-Audio, CD, SACD  
(DSD signal), Video CD, Super VCD  
Note  
1 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High  
Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate  
adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio  
dealer for more information.  
• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front  
panel display. Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long  
as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.  
• Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.  
This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these  
formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.  
2 Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component.  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output  
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback  
component with no HDMI output) to the receiver.  
VSX-1019AH  
DIGITAL  
HDMI  
AUDIO  
IGNABLE  
1
3
COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
ASSIGNABLE  
(
)
1
(
)
1
2
3
1
(
)
IN CD  
2
IN TV/SAT  
2
(
)
BD IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN DVD  
IN DVR  
ASSIGNABLE  
Y
AUDIO  
L
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND  
PRE OUT  
Y
PB  
R
PB  
SUBWOOFER  
MULTI CH IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
TV/SAT  
IN  
DVR  
AUX  
IN  
CD  
IN  
CD-R  
IN  
SUBWOOFER  
DVD  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
P
IN  
DVD  
R
1
P
IN  
)
DVR  
R
2
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
L
CENTER  
R
SURROUND  
L
(
)
(
A
R
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
Y
IR  
OUT  
VIDEO  
PB  
IN  
CON-  
TROL  
PR  
OUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
HDMI IN  
P
R
PB  
Y
R
L
ANALOG  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
Select one  
Select one  
DVD player etc.  
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor  
or flat panel TV  
• If you want to listen to the sound of the TV  
over the receiver, connect the receiver and  
TV with audio cables.  
• Component video should give superior  
picture quality when compared to  
composite. You can also take advantage of  
progressive scan video (if your source and  
TV are both compatible), which delivers a  
very stable, flicker-free picture. See the  
manuals that came with your TV and  
source component to check whether they  
are compatible with progressive-scan  
video.  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
03  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input  
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback  
component) to the receiver.  
• With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected  
with an HDMI cable. Connect the DVD player’s video signals using a composite or component  
cord.  
VSX-1019AH  
DIGITAL  
HDMI  
AUDIO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
ASSIGNABLE  
(
)
1
(
)
IN CD IN TV/SAT  
IN DVD  
(
)
1
2
3
1
(
)
2
2
BD IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN DVR  
CENTER SURROUND  
PRE OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
Y
AUDIO  
L
FRONT  
Y
PB  
PB  
R
SUBWOOFER  
MULTI CH IN  
DVR  
TV/SAT  
IN  
AUX  
IN  
CD  
IN  
CD-R  
SUBWOOFER  
DVD  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
P
R
P
IN  
R
2
)
1
IN  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
L
CENTER  
R
SURROUND  
L
(
A
(
)
DVR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
R
DVD  
Y
IN  
IR  
OUT  
VIDEO  
PB  
IN  
CON-  
TROL  
OUT  
PR  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
PB  
PR  
Y
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
Select one  
PR  
PB  
Y
R
L
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
HDMI OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
Select one  
Select one  
DVD player etc.  
TV  
• Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to  
HD audio on the receiver. Do not use an  
HDMI cable to input video signals.  
Depending on the video component, it may  
not be possible to output signals  
connected by HDMI and other methods  
simultaneously, and it may be necessary to  
make output settings. Please refer to the  
operating instructions supplied with your  
component for more information.  
• Component video should give superior  
picture quality when compared to  
composite. You can also take advantage of  
progressive scan video (if your source and  
TV are both compatible), which delivers a  
very stable, flicker-free picture. See the  
manuals that came with your TV and source  
component to check whether they are  
compatible with progressive-scan video.  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
• If your DVD player has multichannel  
analog outputs, you can connect these  
instead. See also see Connecting the  
multichannel analog inputs on page 28.  
Connecting a satellite/cable  
receiver or other set-top box  
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial  
digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called  
‘set-top boxes’.  
• The input functions below are assigned by  
default to the receiver’s different input  
terminals. Refer to The Input Setup menu  
on page 39 to change the assignments if  
other connections are used.  
For example, the BD terminal is fixed to BD  
input; no other audio signals can be input  
to this terminal.  
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell  
the receiver which input you connected the set-  
top box to (see The Input Setup menu on  
page 39).  
VSX-1019AH  
Input Terminals  
Input  
DIGITAL  
HDMI  
AUDIO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
function  
Digital  
HDMI  
Component  
IN 1  
2
1
)
1
2
3
1
(
)
IN CD  
(
)
(
IN  
BD IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN DVD  
IN TV/SAT  
ASSIGNABLE  
Y
AUDIO  
L
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND  
Y
a
DVD  
COAX-1  
PB  
PB  
R
b
S
MULIN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
DVR  
AUX  
IN  
CD  
IN  
CD-R  
OUT  
TV/  
SAT  
/COAX  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
P
IN  
DVD  
R
PR  
2
IN  
1
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
IN  
L
CENTER  
R
SUR  
(
)
(
)
A
DVR  
R
MONITOR  
OUT  
BD  
(BD)  
IN  
Y
IR  
OUT  
IN  
CON-  
TROL  
VIDEO  
PB  
TV/SAT  
DVR  
OPT-1  
OPT-2  
PR  
OUT  
IN 2  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
HDMI 1  
HDMI 2  
(HDMI-1)  
(HDMI-2)  
(HDMI-3)  
a
HDMI 3  
a
CD  
COAX-2  
R
L
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL  
a.VSX-1019AH model only.  
b.VSX-919AH model only.  
Select one  
VIDEO OUT  
STB  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
03  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting a HDD/DVD recorder,  
VCR and other video sources  
Connecting the multichannel  
analog inputs  
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs  
and outputs suitable for connecting analog or  
digital video devices, including HDD/DVD  
recorders and VCRs.  
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD  
player may have 5.1 channel analog outputs.  
Make sure that the player is set to output  
multichannel analog audio.  
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell  
the receiver which input you connected the  
recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on  
page 39).  
VSX-1019AH  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
PTICAL  
SSIGNABLE  
1
3
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
(
)
2
(
)
1
)
2
(
)
1
2
3
IN DVD IN CD  
IN /SAT  
IN DVR  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
UDIO  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND  
PRE OUT  
L
VSX-1019AH  
R
SUBWOOFER  
MULTI CH IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
DVR  
AUX  
IN  
CD  
IN  
CD-R  
SUBWOOFER  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
L
CEN
R
SURROUND  
L
DIGITAL  
HDMI  
A
R
AUDIO  
ASSIGNABLE  
IR  
1
3
COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
(
)
IN  
1
(TV/SAT)  
1
2
3
IN DVD  
1
I
2
(
)
BD IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN DVR  
E
AUDIO  
L
ENTER SURROUND  
PRE OUT  
Y
CON-  
TROL  
OUT  
PB  
R
SUBWOOFER  
MULTI CH IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
AUX  
IN  
CD  
IN  
CD-R  
ER  
DVR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
P
R
2
DVR  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
IN  
L
CENTER  
R
SURROUND  
L
(
)
A
R
MONITOR  
OUT  
OUT  
VIDEO  
IN  
CON-  
TROL  
OUT  
NENT  
R
L
R
L
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
CENTER  
OUTPUT  
SURROUND  
OUTPUT  
SUBWOOFER  
OUTPUT  
DVD player, etc.  
R
L
R
L
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
ANALOG  
AUDIO IN  
ANALOG  
VIDEO IN  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
Select one  
• If your player has 7.1-channel analog  
outputs, the player’s surround back output  
terminals are not used. Please refer to the  
operating instructions supplied with your  
component for more information.  
HDD/DVD recorder, VCR, etc.  
• In order to record, you must connect the  
analog audio cables (the digital connection  
is for playback only).  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting your equipment  
03  
• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e.,  
it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it  
Connecting other audio  
components  
• If you’re connecting a recorder, connect  
the analog audio outputs to the analog  
audio inputs on the recorder.  
This receiver has both digital and analog  
inputs, allowing you to connect audio  
components for playback.  
This receiver features five stereo audio-only  
inputs. One of these inputs have corresponding  
outputs for use with audio recorders.  
About the WMA9 Pro decoder  
This unit has an on-board Windows Media™  
1
Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) decoder, so  
it is possible to playback WMA9 Pro-encoded  
audio using HDMI, coaxial or optical digital  
connection when connected to a WMA9 Pro-  
compatible player. However, the connected  
DVD player, set-top box, etc. must be able to  
output WMA9 Pro format audio signals  
through a coaxial or optical digital output.  
Most digital components also have analog  
connections.  
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell  
the receiver which input you connected the  
component to (see also The Input Setup menu  
on page 39).  
VSX-1019AH  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
S
ASSIGNABLE  
1
(
)
3
1
(
)
2
(
)
IN TV/SAT  
2
(
)
IN  
OUT  
IN DVD IN CD  
FRONT  
IN DVR  
CENTER SURROUND  
PRE OT  
CD-R  
OUT  
WOOFER  
MULTI CH IN  
SAT  
DVR  
AUX  
IN  
SUBWOOFER  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
EAKERS  
FRONT  
TER  
R
SURROUND  
L
R
A
R
IN  
IR  
OUT  
IN  
CON-  
TROL  
OUT  
R
L
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
ANALOG  
REC  
AUDIO IN  
R
L
AUDIO OUT  
Select one  
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.  
Note  
1 • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz  
sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
03  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting AM/FM antennas  
Connecting external antennas  
To improve FM reception connect an external  
FM antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 .  
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire  
antenna as shown below. To improve reception  
and sound quality, connect external antennas  
(see Connecting external antennas below).  
1
2
75 coaxial cable  
AM  
LOOP  
3
FM  
UNBAL  
75  
AM  
LOOP  
5
ANTENNA  
FM  
UNBAL  
75  
4
ANTENNA  
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m  
(16 ft. to 20 ft.) length of vinyl-coated wire to the  
AM LOOP terminals without disconnecting  
the supplied AM loop antenna.  
fig. a  
fig. b  
fig. c  
For the best possible reception, suspend  
horizontally outdoors.  
Outdoor  
antenna  
1
Pull off the protective shields of both AM  
antenna wires.  
Indoor antenna  
(vinyl-coated wire)  
2
Push open the tabs, then insert one wire  
fully into each terminal, then release the tabs  
to secure the AM antenna wires.  
AM  
LOOP  
FM  
UNBAL  
75  
3
Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached  
5 m to 6 m  
(16 ft. to 20 ft.)  
stand.  
ANTENNA  
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the  
direction indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then  
clip the loop onto the stand (fig. b).  
• If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a  
wall or other surface, secure the stand with  
screws (fig. c) before clipping the loop to  
the stand. Make sure the reception is clear.  
4
Place the AM antenna on a flat surface  
and in a direction giving the best reception.  
5
Connect the FM wire antenna in the same  
way as the AM loop antenna.  
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully  
and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape  
loosely or leave coiled up.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Sub zone  
Main zone  
VSX-1019AH  
This receiver can power up to two independent  
systems in separate rooms after you have  
made the proper MULTI-ZONE connections.  
VIDEO IN  
1
BD IN  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
AUDIO  
L
Y
Different sources can be playing in two zones  
at the same time or, depending on your needs,  
the same source can also be used. The main  
and sub zone have independent power (the  
main zone power can be off while sub zone is  
on) and the sub zone can be controlled by the  
remote or front panel controls. However, you  
may need to specify the volume settings in  
ZONE Audio Setup on page 99.  
PB  
R
DVD  
IN  
ZONE2  
OUT  
PR  
PR  
IN  
1
2
IN  
MONITOR  
Y
VIDEO  
PB  
PR  
AUDIO IN  
R
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
L
Making MULTI-ZONE connections  
It is possible to make these connections if you  
have a separate TV and speakers for the sub  
zone (ZONE2). You will also need a separate  
amplifier if you are not using the MULTI-ZONE  
setup using speaker terminals (Zone 2) below  
for the sub zone.  
MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker  
terminals (Zone 2)  
You must select ZONE 2 in Surround back  
speaker setting on page 94 to use this setup.  
Note that the sound in the sub zone will be  
temporarily interrupted when controlling the  
main zone (for example, changing the input  
function or starting playback).  
MULTI-ZONE listening options  
The following table shows the signals that can  
be output to ZONE 2:  
Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO  
Sub Zone Input functions available  
ZONE2 OUT jacks on this receiver.  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to  
the surround back speaker terminals as shown  
below.  
ZONE2  
Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE2  
a
OUT).  
b
With video signals, the composite  
video (VIDEO ZONE2 OUT) signals can  
be output.  
Sub zone  
Main zone  
VSX-1019AH  
a.Any analog signal. (This does not apply for the MULTI  
CH IN input.)  
SIRIUS IN  
IN  
b.JPEG files cannot be played with the USB input.  
AM  
VIDEO IN  
LOO  
)
VR  
1
BD IN  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
AUDIO  
OUT  
L
Y
Y
FM  
UN  
75  
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (Zone 2)  
PB  
PB  
R
ZONE2 OOFE  
D
R
VD  
T
OUT  
IN  
P
IN  
DVD  
R
PR  
2
1
IN  
B
L
)
Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO  
L
R
ND  
SURROUND BACK/  
(
)
(
)
DVR  
(
Single  
MONITOR  
Y
ZONE2 OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the  
VIDEO ZONE2 OUT jack, both on this receiver.  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to  
the sub zone amplifier as shown in the  
following illustration.  
VIDEO  
L
R
P
B
PR  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
03  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting an IR receiver  
2
Connect the IR IN jack of another  
component to the IR OUT jack on the rear of  
this receiver to link it to the IR receiver.  
Please see the manual supplied with your IR  
receiver for the type of cable necessary for the  
connection.  
If you keep your stereo components in a closed  
cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the  
sub zone remote control in another zone, you  
can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles  
or Xantech unit) to control your system instead  
of the remote sensor on the front panel of this  
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to  
the IR receiver, see Operating other Pioneer  
components with this unit’s sensor below  
to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead  
of the IR OUT jack.  
1
receiver.  
1
Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN  
jack on the rear of this receiver.  
Closet or shelving unit  
Operating other Pioneer  
components with this unit’s  
sensor  
Pioneer  
Non-Pioneer  
component  
component  
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL  
jacks which can be used to link components  
together so that you can use just the remote  
sensor of one component. When you use a  
remote control, the control signal is passed  
along the chain to the appropriate component.2  
CONTROL  
IR  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
1
2
3
BD IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
AUDIO  
L
Y
Y
Important  
P
B
PB  
R
ZONE2  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
DVR  
AUX  
IN  
CD  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
PR  
IN  
DVD  
PR  
2
• Note that if you use this feature, make sure  
that you also have at least one set of analog  
audio, video or HDMI jacks connected to  
another component for grounding purposes.  
1
SP  
IN  
)
DVR  
(
)
(
A
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
Y
IR  
OUT  
VIDEO  
PB  
IN  
CON-  
TROL  
OUT  
PR  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
1
Decide which component you want to use  
the remote sensor of.  
VSX-1019AH  
When you want to control any component in  
the chain, this is the remote sensor at which  
you’ll point the corresponding remote control.  
IR receiver  
Note  
1 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver  
remote sensor window.  
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component  
to check for IR compatibility.  
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor  
on the front panel.  
2 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, see Setting the remote to control  
other components on page 73.  
• If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to con-  
trol this unit using the remote sensor.  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting your equipment  
03  
2
Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that  
component to the CONTROL IN jack of  
another Pioneer component.  
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each  
end for the connection.  
Connecting your  
SiriusConnect™ Tuner  
To receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio broadcasts, you  
will need to activate your SiriusConnect™ tuner.  
VSX-1019AH  
VSX-1019AH  
HDM  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
OPTICAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
SIRIUS IN  
1
2
3
BD IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
AM  
ASSIGNABLE  
Y
AUDIO  
L
LOOP  
1
(
)
2
(
)
IN TV/SAT  
IN DVR  
CENTER SURROUND  
Y
PRE OUT  
M  
UNBAL  
75  
PB  
PB  
R
ZONE2  
OUT  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
DVR  
AUX  
IN  
CD  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
P
IN  
DVD  
R
PR  
2
SUBWOOFER  
ULTI CH IN  
SUBWOOFER  
1
SP  
IN  
)
DVR  
ANTENNA  
(
)
(
A
B
L
ENTER  
R
SURROUND  
L
R
SURROUND BACK/  
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
Single  
IN  
Y
IR  
Antenna  
OUT  
VIDEO  
PB  
IN  
CON-  
TROL  
OUT  
PR  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
SIRIUS  
H
SiriusConnect™  
HOME tuner  
AC adapter  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
Connect a SiriusConnect™ tuner to the  
SIRIUS IN jack on the rear of this receiver.  
You will also need to connect the antenna and  
AC adapter to the SiriusConnect™ tuner.  
Continue the chain in the same way for as  
many components as you have.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
03  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting a component to the  
front panel inputs  
Connecting an iPod  
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal  
that will allow you to control playback of audio  
content from your iPod using the controls of  
this receiver.  
The front panel inputs comprise a composite  
video jack (VIDEO) and stereo analog audio  
inputs (AUDIO L/R). You can use these  
connections for any kind of audio/video  
component, but they are especially convenient  
for portable equipment such as camcorders,  
video games and portable audio/video  
equipment.  
Switch the receiver into standby then use  
the supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod  
to the iPod/iPhone/USB terminal on the front  
panel of this receiver.  
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to  
access the iPod/iPhone/USB terminal.  
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to  
access the front panel inputs.  
• It is also possible to connect using the  
cable included with the iPod, but in this  
case it is not possible to view pictures via  
the receiver.  
• Select these inputs using INPUT SELECT  
(remote) or the INPUT SELECTOR dial  
(front panel) to select VIDEO.  
• For the cable connection, refer to also the  
operating instructions for iPod.  
iPod  
iPhone  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
USB  
VIDEO  
L
R
iPod  
iPhone  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
USB  
VIDEO  
L
R
MULTI-ZONE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
SPEAKERS  
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
iPod  
iPhone  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
MULTI-ZONE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
USB  
VIDEO  
L
R
SPEAKERS  
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
iPod  
iPhone  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
USB  
VIDEO  
L
R
This receiver  
This receiver  
TV game, video camera,  
etc.  
iPod cable  
(supplied)  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
MENU  
  
iPod  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting a USB device  
03  
Plugging in the receiver  
It is possible to playback files using the USB  
interface on the front of this receiver.  
Only plug in after you have connected all your  
components to this receiver, including the  
speakers.  
Switch the receiver into standby then  
connect your USB device to the iPod/iPhone/  
USB terminal on the front panel of this  
receiver.  
Plug the AC power cord into a convenient  
AC power outlet.1  
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to  
access the iPod/iPhone/USB terminal.  
CAUTION  
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do  
not pull out the plug by tugging the cord,  
and never touch the power cord when your  
hands are wet, as this could cause a short  
circuit or electric shock. Do not place the  
unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on  
the power cord or pinch the cord in any  
other way. Never make a knot in the cord or  
tie it with other cables. The power cords  
should be routed so that they are not likely  
to be stepped on. A damaged power cord  
can cause a fire or give you an electric  
shock. Check the power cord once in a  
while. If you find it damaged, ask your  
nearest Pioneer authorized independent  
service company for a replacement.  
iPod  
iPhone  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
USB  
VIDEO  
L
R
MULTI-ZONE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
SPEAKERS  
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
iPod  
iPhone  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
USB  
VIDEO  
L
R
This receiver  
USB mass  
storage device  
• The receiver should be disconnected by  
removing the mains plug from the wall  
socket when not in regular use, e.g., when  
on vacation.  
• Make sure the blue STANDBY/ON light  
has gone out before unplugging.  
• If you have connected speakers with a 6 Ω  
impedance, change the impedance setting  
before turning on the power.  
Note  
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins. You  
cannot carry out any operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this  
process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the KURO LINK mode to OFF,  
you can skip this process. For details about the KURO LINK feature, see KURO LINK on page 60.  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
04  
Basic Setup  
Chapter 4:  
Basic Setup  
2
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME  
MENU  
.
Switching the speaker impedance  
We recommend using speakers of 8 with this  
system, but it is possible to switch the  
impedance setting if you plan to use speakers  
with a 6 impedance rating.  
3
Select ‘OSD Language’ from the System  
Setup menu.  
4.SystemSetup  
A/V RECEIVER  
a.Manual SP Setup  
b. Input Setup  
1
Switch the receiver into standby.  
c. OSD Language  
d. Other Setup  
2
While holding down ENTER on the front  
4c.OSD Language  
A/V RECEIVER  
panel, press STANDBY/ON  
.
Language  
:
English  
The display shows RESET NO .  
Exit  
Use TUNE +/– (or / on the remote control)  
to select SPEAKER 8, and then use  
PRESET +/– (or / on the remote control) to  
select SPEAKER 8or SPEAKER 6.  
OK  
Exit  
Return  
SPEAKER 8– Use this setting if your  
speakers are rated at 8 or more.  
4
Select the desired language.  
English  
SPEAKER 6– Use this setting if your  
speakers are rated at 6 .  
French  
German  
Italian  
Spanish  
Dutch  
Changing the OSD display  
language (OSD Language)  
The language used on the on-screen display  
can be changed.  
Russian  
5
Select ‘OK’ to change the language.  
• The explanations in these operating  
instructions are for when English is  
selected for the OSD.  
4c.OSD Language  
A/V RECEIVER  
Language  
:
English  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control,  
1
Press  
then press HOME MENU  
.
OK  
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen  
appears on your TV. Use /// and  
ENTER to navigate through the screens and  
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the  
current menu.  
Exit  
Return  
The setting is completed and the System Setup  
menu reappears automatically.  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Setup  
04  
1
2
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Automatically setting up for  
surround sound (Auto MCACC)  
Connect the microphone to the MCACC  
SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.  
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to  
access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack.  
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the  
acoustic characteristics of your listening area,  
taking into account ambient noise, speaker  
connection and speaker size, and tests for both  
channel delay and channel level. After you  
have set up the microphone provided with your  
system, the receiver uses the information from  
a series of test tones to optimize the speaker  
settings and equalization for your particular  
room.  
Place the microphone so that it’s about ear level  
at your normal listening position (use a tripod if  
possible). Make sure there are no obstacles  
between the speakers and the microphone.  
iPod  
iPhone  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
USB  
VIDEO  
L
R
MASTER  
VOLUME  
iPod  
iPhone  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
USB  
VIDEO  
L
R
Make sure you do this before moving on to  
Playing a source on page 41.  
Important  
• Make sure the microphone and speakers  
are not moved during the Auto MCACC  
Setup.  
The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the  
microphone is connected.  
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will  
overwrite any existing settings for the  
MCACC preset you select.  
1
1a.Full Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the  
headphones should be disconnected and  
the iPod/USB or SIRIUS Radio function  
should not be selected as an input  
function.  
Surr Back System  
Save SYMMETRY to : M1.MEMORY 1  
:
Normal  
START  
Exit  
Return  
CAUTION  
3
Select Surr Back System setting,2 select  
an MCACC preset3, press  
select START.4  
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC  
Setup are output at high volume.  
Note  
1 • You can’t use the HOME MENU when the iPod/USB or SIRIUS Radio input function is selected (in either the main  
or sub zone). When you set ZONE 2 to ON (page 69), you can’t use the HOME MENU.  
• If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.  
2 • If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read  
through Surround back speaker setting on page 94 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before  
continuing to step 4.  
• If you have THX-certified speakers, select Return, then select Auto MCACC for the THX Speaker setting. See  
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 78 for more on this.  
3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose  
an unused preset for now (you can rename it later in Data Management on page 91).  
4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select Return, then select Auto MCACC to save  
other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 78 for  
more on this.  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
04  
Basic Setup  
Select Normal (Surround back), Speaker B,  
Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2 for the Surr Back  
System setting according to connections to  
the surround back speaker terminals.  
The configuration shown on-screen should  
reflect the actual speakers you have.  
• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker  
configuration displayed isn’t correct), there  
may be a problem with the speaker  
connection.  
If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off  
the power and check the speaker  
connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a  
problem, you can simply use / to select  
the speaker and / to change the  
setting and continue.  
4
Follow the instructions on-screen.  
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if  
you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched  
on and set to a comfortable volume level.  
5
Wait for the test tones to finish, then  
confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI  
screen.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while  
the receiver outputs test tones to determine the  
speakers present in your setup. Try to be as  
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the  
speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted.  
2
Check the speaker connections.  
1
quiet as possible while it’s doing this.  
If the connections were wrong, turn off the  
power, disconnect the power cable, then  
reconnect properly. After this, perform the  
Full Auto MCACC procedure again.  
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds  
while the speaker configuration check screen  
is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will  
resume automatically. In this case, you don’t  
need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 6.  
6
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press  
ENTER  
.
• With error messages (such as Too much  
ambient noise! or Check microphone.)  
select RETRY after checking for ambient  
noise (see Problems when using the Auto  
MCACC Setup below) and verifying the mic  
connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a  
problem, you can simply select GO NEXT  
and continue.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while  
the receiver outputs more test tones to  
determine the optimum receiver settings for  
Channel Level, Speaker Distance, Standing  
Wave and Acoustic Cal EQ.  
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this  
is happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.  
1a.Full Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
Now Analyzing...  
2/10  
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
:
:
:
OK  
Speaker YES/NO  
1a.Full Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
10  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
YES  
Exit  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
OK  
RETRY  
Exit  
Cancel  
Note  
1 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.  
2 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase  
(dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly  
connected. If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue.  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Setup  
04  
7
The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is  
tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up  
to which terminal so the buttons on the remote  
control correspond to the components you’ve  
connected.  
completed and the Home Menu menu  
reappears automatically.1  
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from  
this receiver upon completion of the Auto  
MCACC Setup.  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Use RECEIVER to switch on.  
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup  
should give you excellent surround sound from  
your system, but it is also possible to adjust  
these settings manually using The Advanced  
MCACC menu on page 77 or The system and  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control,  
2
Press  
then press HOME MENU  
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen  
appears on your TV. Use /// and  
ENTER to navigate through the screens and  
select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm  
and exit the current menu.  
2
the other setup on page 93.  
Problems when using the Auto  
MCACC Setup  
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME  
If the room environment is not optimal for the  
Auto MCACC Setup (too much background  
noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking  
the speakers from the microphone) the final  
settings may be incorrect. Check for household  
appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.),  
that may be affecting the environment and  
switch them off if necessary. If there are any  
instructions showing in the front panel display,  
please follow them.  
MENU  
.
4
Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System  
Setup menu.  
4.SystemSetup  
A/V RECEIVER  
a.Manual SP Setup  
b. Input Setup  
c. OSD Language  
d. Other Setup  
4b.Input Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
INPUT  
Input Name  
Input Skip  
:
:
:
DVD  
Rename  
OFF  
Digital In  
HDMI Input  
Component In  
:
:
:
COAX-1  
Exit  
---  
• Some older TVs may interfere with the  
operation of the microphone. If this seems  
to be happening, switch off the TV when  
doing the Auto MCACC Setup.  
Comp-1  
Exit  
Finish  
5
Select the input function that you want to  
The Input Setup menu  
set up.  
The default names correspond with the names  
next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as  
DVD or VIDEO) which, in turn, correspond  
with the names on the remote control.  
You only need to make settings in the Input  
Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your digital  
equipment according to the default settings  
(see Input function default and possible  
settings on page 40). In this case, you need to  
Note  
1 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Checking MCACC Data on page 89  
for more on this.  
2 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5  
inches) will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup  
on page 94.  
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting  
should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.  
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing  
environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
04  
Basic Setup  
6
Select the input(s) to which you’ve  
Input function default and possible  
settings  
connected your component.  
For example, if your DVD player only has an  
optical output, you will need to change the  
DVD input function’s Digital In setting from  
COAX-1 (VSX-1019AH model)/COAX (VSX-  
919AH model) (default) to the optical input  
you’ve connected it to.The numbering (OPT-1  
to 2) corresponds with the numbers beside the  
inputs on the back of the receiver.  
The terminals on the receiver generally  
correspond to the name of one of the input  
functions. If you have connected components  
to this receiver differently from (or in addition  
to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup  
menu on page 39 to tell the receiver how you’ve  
connected up. The dots () indicate possible  
assignments.  
• If your component is connected via a  
component video cable to an input  
terminal other than the default, you must  
tell the receiver which input terminal your  
component is connected to, or else you  
may see the composite video signals  
Input Terminals  
Input  
function  
Digital  
HDMI  
Component  
a
c
DVD  
IN 1  
COAX-1  
b
/COAX  
1
BD  
(BD)  
instead of the component video signals.  
c
TV/SAT  
OPT-1  
OPT-2  
7
When you’re finished, proceed to the  
c
DVR  
IN 2  
settings for other inputs.  
There are three optional settings in addition to  
the assignment of the input jacks:  
VIDEO  
HDMI 1  
HDMI 2  
(HDMI-1)  
(HDMI-2)  
(HDMI-3)  
Input Name – You can choose to rename  
the input function for easier identification.  
Select Rename to do so, or Default to  
return to the system default.  
a
HDMI 3  
iPod/USB  
CD  
Input Skip – When set to ON, that input is  
skipped when selecting the input using  
INPUT SELECT. (DVD and other inputs can  
be still be selected directly with the input  
function buttons.)  
a
COAX-2  
CD-R/TAPE  
TUNER  
AUX  
4b.Input Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
c
MULTI CH IN  
INPUT  
Input Name  
Input Skip  
:
:
:
DVD  
Rename  
OFF  
SIRIUS  
Digital In  
HDMI Input  
Component In  
:
:
:
COAX-1  
---  
Comp-1  
a.VSX-1019AH model only.  
b.VSX-919AH model only.  
c.With KURO LINK set to ON, assignments cannot be  
made (see KURO LINK on page 60).  
Exit  
Finish  
8
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the System Setup menu.  
Note  
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in  
Setting the Video options on page 67), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as  
you used to connect your video component.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic playback  
05  
Chapter 5:  
Basic playback  
It is possible to check on the front panel display  
whether or not multi-channel playback is being  
performed properly.  
Playing a source  
Here are the basic instructions for playing a  
source (such as a DVD disc) with your home  
theater system.  
When using a surround back speaker,  
2D+PLIIx MOVIE is displayed when playing  
Dolby Digital signals, and DTS+Neo:6 is  
displayed when playing DTS 5.1-channel signals.  
1
Switch on your system components and  
receiver.  
When not using a surround back speaker,  
DOLBY DIGITAL is displayed when playing  
Dolby Digital signals.  
Start by switching on the playback component  
1
(for example a DVD player), your TV and  
subwoofer (if you have one), then the receiver  
(press RECEIVER).  
If the display does not correspond to the input  
signal and listening mode, check the  
connections and settings.  
• Make sure the setup microphone is  
disconnected.  
4
Use the volume control to adjust the  
2
Select the input function you want to  
volume level.  
play.  
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all  
sound is coming from the speakers connected  
to this receiver.  
You can use the input function buttons on the  
remote control, INPUT SELECT, or the front  
panel INPUT SELECTOR dial.  
3
Press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/  
ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO  
SURROUND’ and start playback of the  
source.3  
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround  
sound DVD disc, you should hear surround  
sound. If you are playing a stereo source, you  
will only hear sound from the front left/right  
speakers in the default listening mode.  
• See also Listening to your system on  
page 53 for information on different ways  
of listening to sources.  
Note  
1 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO  
jacks on your TV, make sure that the VIDEO input is now selected).  
2 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 58).  
3 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be  
set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option,  
set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.  
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this  
case, the receiver must be set to a multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 53 if you  
need to do this) if you want multichannel surround sound.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
05  
Basic playback  
Playing a source with HDMI  
connection  
Selecting the multichannel analog  
inputs  
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD  
player as above, you must select the analog  
multichannel inputs for surround sound  
Use INPUT SELECT to select the HDMI  
input you’ve connected to (for example,  
HDMI 1).  
You can also perform the same operation by  
using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front  
panel or by pressing HDMI on the remote  
control repeatedly.  
1
playback.  
1
Make sure you have set the playback  
source to the proper output setting.  
player to output multichannel analog audio.  
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the  
Audio options on page 64 to THROUGH if  
you want to hear HDMI audio output from  
your TV or flat panel TV (no sound will be  
heard from this receiver).  
2
Use INPUT SELECT to select MULTI CH IN.  
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on  
the front panel.  
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using,  
the analog output level of the subwoofer  
channel may be too low. In this case, the  
output level of the subwoofer can be  
increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In  
Setup in Other Setup. For details, see  
Multi Channel Input Setup on page 99.  
• If the video signal does not appear on your  
TV or flat panel TV, try adjusting the  
resolution settings on your component or  
display. Note that some components (such  
as video game units) have resolutions that  
may not be converted. In this case, use an  
analog video connection.  
Note  
1 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.  
• You can’t listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs.  
• With MULTI CH IN inputs, it is possible to play pictures simultaneously. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup  
on page 99.  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic playback  
Playing an iPod  
05  
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod  
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take  
advantage of the GUI screen of your TV connected  
to this receiver.3 You can also control all operations  
for music in the front panel display of this receiver.  
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that  
will allow you to control playback of audio content  
from your iPod using the controls of this receiver.1  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Finding what you want to play  
When your iPod is connected to this receiver,  
you can browse songs stored on your iPod by  
playlist, artist name, album name, song name,  
genre or composer, similar to using your iPod  
directly.  
See Connecting an iPod on page 34.  
2
Press iPod USB on the remote control to  
switch the receiver to the iPod/USB  
.
Loading appears in the GUI screen while the  
receiver verifies the connection and retrieves  
data from the iPod.  
1
Use / to select a category, then press  
ENTER to browse that category.  
• To return to the previous level any time,  
press RETURN.  
When the display shows iPod top menu you’re  
ready to play music from the iPod.  
2
Main Zone:  
2
Use / to browse the selected category  
iPod  
A/V RECEIVER  
(e.g., albums).  
Playlists  
Artists  
Albums  
Songs  
• Use / to move to previous/next levels.  
Podcasts  
Genres  
Composers  
Audiobooks  
1 / 9  
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at  
what you want to play, then press  
to start  
playback.4  
iPod CTRL  
Main Zone:  
Track number  
Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):  
Track title  
Play mode  
Artist name  
Track Title  
Top Menu  
PLAY  
3:02  
-2:02  
iPod  
Shuffle On  
Artist Name  
Album Title  
xxxx/xxxx  
[
[
Playlists  
Artists  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Album title  
[ Albums  
[
[
[
[
[
Songs  
Podcasts  
Genres  
Composers  
Audiobooks  
1/9  
iPod  
Now Playing  
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Chapter Number : xxx/xxx  
Playing time  
File information  
iPod CTRL  
List  
Note  
1 • This system is compatible with the audio and the video of the iPod nano, iPod fifth generation, iPod classic, iPod  
touch and iPhone (iPod shuffle is not supported). However, that some of the functions may be restricted for some  
models. Note, however, compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod and iPhone. Please be  
sure to use the latest available software version.  
• iPod and iPhone are licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted  
to reproduce.  
• Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer  
off before connecting.  
• Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any  
inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from the iPod failure  
2 • The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver.  
VSX-919AH model only: iPod/USB function cannot be selected for the MULTI-ZONE feature (page 69).  
3 • Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as #.  
• This feature is not available for photos or video clips on your iPod. To display video clips, switch iPod operation to  
the iPod (see Switching the iPod controls on page 44).  
4 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05  
Basic playback  
Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):  
Button What it does  
Press repeatedly to switch between  
Repeat One Repeat All and Repeat Off  
Track number  
File information  
Track title  
Play mode  
Playing time  
Play  
xxxx/xxxx  
Chapxxx/xxx  
,
.
Track Title  
Shuffle On  
-2:02  
Press repeatedly to switch between  
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Albums and  
Shuffle Off.  
3:02  
Artist Name  
Album Title  
Artist name  
Album title  
DISP  
Press repeatedly to change the song  
playback information displayed in the  
front panel display.  
Navigation through categories on your iPod  
looks like this:  
Playlists Songs  
Artists Albums Songs  
Albums Songs  
ENTER  
When browsing, press to move to next  
levels. During playback, press to set the  
play and pause modes.  
Songs  
Podcasts  
RETURN When browsing, press to move to  
previous levels.  
Genres Artists Albums Songs  
Composers Albums Songs  
Audiobooks  
/  
When browsing, press to move to  
previous/next levels.  
Shuffle Songs  
/  
During Audiobook playback, press to  
switch the playback speed: Faster   
Normal Slower  
Tip  
TOP  
MENU  
Press to return to the iPod top menu  
• You can play all of the songs in a particular  
category by selecting the All item at the top  
of each category list. For example, you can  
play all the songs by a particular artist.  
screen.  
1
Switching the iPod controls  
You can switch over the iPod controls between  
the iPod and the receiver.  
Basic playback controls  
The following table shows the basic playback  
controls for your iPod. Press iPod USB to  
switch the remote control to the iPod/USB  
operation mode.  
1
Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod  
controls.2  
This enables operation and display on your  
iPod, and this receiver’s remote control and  
GUI screen become inactive.  
Button What it does  
Press to start playback.  
2
Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to  
If you start playback when something  
other than a song is selected, all the  
songs that fall into that category will play.  
the receiver controls.  
Pauses/unpauses playback.  
/ Press and hold during playback to start  
scanning.  
/ Press to skip to previous/next track.  
Note  
1 You cannot use this function, when an iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.  
2 When this function is set, iPod images cannot be played on this receiver. However, when video clips recorded on the  
iPod are played, the playback picture is displayed.  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic playback  
05  
Important  
Playing a USB device  
1
If an Over Current message lights in the  
display, the power requirements of the USB  
device are too high for this receiver. Try  
following the points below:  
It is possible to playback files using the USB  
interface on the front of this receiver.  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
2
See Connecting a USB device on page 35.  
Press iPod USB on the remote control to  
switch the receiver to the iPod/USB  
• Switch the receiver off, then on again.  
2
• Reconnect the USB device with the  
receiver switched off.  
.
Loading appears in the GUI screen as this  
• Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with  
the device) for USB power.  
receiver starts recognizing the USB device  
3
connected. When the display shows USB Top  
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely  
your USB device is incompatible.  
menu you’re ready to playback from the USB  
device.  
Main Zone:  
Playing back audio files stored on a  
USB memory device  
USB Top  
A/V RECEIVER  
Music  
Photos  
Slideshow Setup  
The maximum number of levels that you can  
select in Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can  
display and play back up to 30 000 folders and  
4
1 / 3  
files within a USB memory device.  
Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):  
USB Top  
[ Music  
[ Photos  
[ Slideshow Setup  
]
]
]
1/3  
Note  
1 • Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and  
digital audio players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect this unit to a personal computer  
for USB playback.  
• Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and  
assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.  
2 Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.  
3 • If the file selected cannot be played back, this receiver automatically skips to the next file playable.  
• When the file currently being played back has no title assigned to it, the file name is displayed in the GUI screen  
instead; when neither the album name nor the artist name is present, the row is displayed as a blank space.  
• Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.  
VSX-919AH model only: iPod/USB function cannot be selected for the MULTI-ZONE feature (page 69).  
• If this error occurs, playback is interrupted and the next playable file is played automatically.  
• This error may occur if the title information is changed on a computer, etc.  
4 • Playback stops when the last song in a USB memory device is played back to the end.  
• When a USB memory device with a large capacity is connected, it may take some time to read all the contents.  
• This receiver does not support a USB hub.  
• Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.  
• DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
05  
Basic playback  
1
Use / to select ‘Music’ from the USB  
Basic playback controls  
Top menu.  
The following table shows the basic playback  
controls for your USB memory device. Press  
iPod USB to switch the remote control to the  
iPod/USB operation mode.  
USB Top  
A/V RECEIVER  
Music  
Photos  
Slideshow Setup  
Music  
A/V RECEIVER  
Button What it does  
Top Menu  
Folder1  
Press to start playback.  
Folder2  
Folder3  
Music1  
Music2  
Music3  
Music4  
Music5  
1 / 9  
1 / 3  
Pauses/unpauses playback.  
/ Press and hold during playback to start  
scanning.  
Return  
/ Press to skip to previous/next track.  
Press repeatedly to switch between  
2
Use / to select a folder, then press  
Repeat One  
,
Repeat Folder, Repeat All  
ENTER to browse that folder.  
• To return to the previous level any time,  
press RETURN.  
and Repeat Off  
.
Press repeatedly to switch between  
Random On and Random Off.  
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at  
DISP  
Press repeatedly to change the song  
playback information displayed in the  
front panel display.  
what you want to play, then press  
playback.  
to start  
Main Zone:  
ENTER  
When browsing, press to move to next  
levels. During playback, press to set the  
play and pause modes.  
Track number  
Track title or File name  
Playing time  
Play mode  
Artist name  
RETURN When browsing, press to move to  
Track Title  
Top Menu  
PLAY  
3:02  
-2:02  
previous levels.  
Random On  
xxxx/xxxx  
Artist Name  
Album Title  
/  
When browsing, press to move to  
previous/next levels.  
Album title or Folder  
name  
USB  
Now Playing  
TOP  
Press to return to the USB Top menu.  
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx  
File information  
MENU  
Return  
Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):  
Track title or File name  
Play  
xxxx/xxxx  
Track number  
Play mode  
Track Title  
Random On  
-2:02  
Playing time  
3:02  
Album title or Folder  
name  
Artist Name  
Album Title  
Artist name  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
Slideshow Setup  
Make the various settings for playing  
slideshows of photo files here.  
Playing back photo files stored on a  
USB memory device  
1
1
Use / to select ‘Photos’ from the USB  
1
Use / to select ‘Slideshow Setup’  
Top menu.  
from the USB Top menu.  
USB Top  
A/V RECEIVER  
USB Top  
A/V RECEIVER  
Music  
Photos  
Slideshow Setup  
Music  
Photos  
Slideshow Setup  
Slideshow Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Top Menu  
1 / 3  
Theme  
Interval  
BGM  
Music Select  
Folder1  
:
:
:
:
Normal(OFF)  
5 sec  
ON  
Select  
1 / 3  
2
Use / to select a folder, then press  
ENTER to browse that folder.  
To return to the previous level any time, press  
RETURN.  
Return  
2
Select the setting you want.  
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at  
Theme – Add various effects to the  
what you want to play, then press  
to start  
slideshow.  
playback.2  
Interval – Set the interval for switching the  
photos. This may not be available  
depending on the Theme setting.  
The selected content is displayed in full screen  
and starts a slideshow.  
After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER  
toggles between play and pause.  
BGM – Play music files stored on the USB  
device while displaying photos.  
Basic playback controls  
Music Select – Select the folder containing  
the music files to be played when BGM is  
set to ON.  
Button(s) Function  
ENTER, Starts displaying a photo and playing a  
slideshow.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the USB Top menu.  
RETURN, Stops the Player and returns to the  
previous menu.  
Displays the previous photo content  
Display the next photo content  
Pauses/unpauses the slideshow  
Note  
1 VSX-1019AH model only: Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.  
2 If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for five minutes, the list screen reappears.  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05  
Basic playback  
About playable file formats  
The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not  
available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats.  
Music files  
Category Extension Stream  
a
.mp3  
MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio  
Layer-3  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
16 bit  
MP3  
2 ch  
Bitrate  
8 kbps to 320 kbps  
Supported/Supported  
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
8 bit, 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit  
2 ch, Monaural  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
16 bit  
VBR/CBR  
WAV  
.wav  
LPCM  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
b
WMA  
.wma  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
WMA8/9  
2 ch  
Bitrate  
8 kbps to 320 kbps  
Supported/Supported  
VBR/CBR  
a.“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”  
b.Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported;  
specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice.  
Photo files  
Category Extension  
JPEG  
.jpg  
.jpeg  
.jpe  
.jif  
Format  
Meeting the following conditions:  
• Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF  
format)  
• Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0  
.jfif  
Resolution  
30 to 8192 pixels vertical, 40 to 8192 pixels horizontal  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic playback  
05  
Listening to SIRIUS Radio  
After connecting, you will be able to use this  
receiver to select channels and navigate  
categories using the GUI screen. The  
information displayed is as follows:  
Using SIRIUS Radio  
With SIRIUS you get The Best Radio on Radio™  
with all your favorite entertainment including  
100 % commercial-free music, plus superior  
sports coverage, uncensored talk and comedy,  
world-class entertainment, news, weather and  
more for your car, home or office. For more  
information visit sirius.com or siriuscanada.ca  
3
Main Zone:  
Preset class  
Song name  
Signal strength  
Johnny B. Goode  
Top Menu  
Preset Class : A  
Preset  
SIRIUS is available in the US for subscribers  
with addresses in the continental US and is  
available in Canada for subscribers with a  
Canadian address. Required subscription plus  
compatible SIRIUS tuner and antenna are  
required and sold separately. SIRIUS  
Programming is subject to change. Visit http:/  
/www.sirius.com for the most complete and  
up-to-date channel lineup and product  
information.  
Chuck Berry  
Fifties (50’s)  
Artist name  
Channel name  
A 1  
1 2 3  
Channel Number  
Preset Number  
Channel number  
Category  
Category : Decades  
Composer : Chuck Berry  
Category  
Composer name  
Preset number  
Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):  
Channel name  
1
Press SIRIUS to switch to the SIRIUS input.  
Song name  
Preset class  
For best reception, you may need to move the  
SiriusConnect™ tuner antenna near a window  
(refer to the manual for the SiriusConnect™  
Home tuner for antenna placement  
recommendations).  
Johnny B. Goode  
Signal strength  
A
Chuck Berry  
Artist name  
Preset number  
Fifties (50’s)  
A1  
123  
Decades  
Channel number  
Chuck Berry  
• If after pressing SIRIUS the display shows  
Antenna Error, try disconnecting the  
antenna and reconnecting. If the display  
Composer name  
Category  
2
shows Check Sirius Tuner, check the  
connection of the AC adapter and this  
receiver to the SiriusConnect™ tuner.  
Note  
1 • In order to activate your radio subscription, you will need the SIRIUS ID (SID) which uniquely identifies your tuner.  
The SID may be found on a sticker located on the packaging, or on the bottom of the tuner itself. The label will have  
a printed 12-digit SID number. When you have located the SID, write it down in the space provided near the end of  
this manual. Contact SIRIUS on the internet at: https://activate.siriusradio.com  
• Follow the prompts to activate your subscription, or you can also call SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-  
539-7474).  
• Select 0 (SIRIUS ID) from the GUI screen to check the Radio ID of the SIRIUS Connect tuner (see Selecting channels  
and browsing by genre below).  
2 You can check the strength of reception in Using the SIRIUS Menu on page 51.  
3 It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage of the GUI screens. You can, however, use just the front  
panel display to do everything if you prefer.  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05  
Basic playback  
Selecting channels and browsing by genre  
From the SIRIUS Channel Guide, you can  
browse SIRIUS Radio channels in the order  
that they appear, or you can narrow your  
channel search by genre.  
Saving channel presets  
This receiver can memorize up to 63 channels,  
stored in seven banks, or classes (A to G) of 9  
channels each.  
1
Select the channel you want to memorize.  
Main Zone:  
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre  
above.  
Channel Guide  
A/V RECEIVER  
184 Weather  
185 TWN  
2
Press T.EDIT  
.
186 Hardcore Sports  
187 InfoPlus  
188 RCI Plus  
192 Rock Velours  
193 energie2  
198 Playboy  
The display shows a blinking memory class.  
3
Press CLASS to select one of the seven  
classes, then press / to select the channel  
preset you want.  
Exit  
You can also use the number buttons to select  
a preset.  
Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):  
Channel Guide  
4
Press ENTER.  
[
[
184 Weather  
185 TWN  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and  
number stop blinking and the receiver stores  
the SIRIUS channel.  
[ 186 Hardcore Sports  
[
[
[
[
[
187 InfoPlus  
188 RCI Plus  
192 Rock Velours  
193 energie2  
198 Playboy  
1/xxx  
Tip  
1
Press / to enter the SIRIUS Channel  
Guide, then navigate through the channels  
one at time with /, then press ENTER to  
listen to the SIRIUS radio broadcast.  
• To browse by genre, first press  
• You can also press MEMORY during  
reception display to save the information of  
up to five songs. See Using the SIRIUS  
1
Menu below to recall this information.  
CATEGORY, use / to select a genre,  
then press ENTER.  
Listening to channel presets  
• To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN  
.
1
Press CLASS to select the class in which  
the channel is stored.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.  
Tip  
2
Press / to select the channel preset  
• You can select channels directly by  
pressing D.ACCESS, then the three-digit  
channel number.  
you want.  
• You can also use the number buttons on  
the remote control to recall the channel  
preset.  
• You can press DISP to change SIRIUS Radio  
information in the front panel display.  
• The currently selected channel is  
automatically chosen (without pressing  
ENTER) after 10 seconds.  
Note  
1 You can reset the Channel presets, Memory, Channel Skip/Add, Parental Lock and Password settings in Resetting the  
system on page 72.  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic playback  
05  
3
Tune to a station.  
Using the SIRIUS Menu  
The SIRIUS Menu provides additional SIRIUS  
Radio features.  
There are three ways to do this:  
Automatic tuning – To search for stations  
in the currently selected band, press and  
hold TUNE / for about a second. The  
receiver will start searching for the next  
station, stopping when it has found one.  
Repeat to search for other stations.  
1
Press TOP MENU  
.
2
Use / to select a menu item, then  
press ENTER  
.
Choose from the following menu items:  
Manual tuning – To change the frequency  
one step at a time, press TUNE /.  
Channel Skip/Add – Use / and ENTER  
to select channels you would like to  
remove/restore from/to the channel guide.  
High speed tuning – Press and hold  
TUNE / for high speed tuning. Release  
the button at the frequency you want.  
Parental Lock – Use / and ENTER to  
select channels you would like to place  
under parental lock. Channels put under  
parental lock are not displayed in the  
Channel Guide, but may be accessed by  
directly inputting their channel number  
and providing the parental lock password.  
Improving FM sound  
If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t light  
when tuning to an FM station because the  
signal is weak, press MPX to switch the  
receiver into mono reception mode. This  
should improve the sound quality and allow  
you to enjoy the broadcast.  
Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of  
satellite and terrestrial reception.  
Memory Recall – Use / to browse your  
saved song information (see Tip above).  
Using Neural THX  
This feature uses Neural Surround™, THX  
®
Password Set Set the parental lock  
technologies to achieve optimal surround  
password.  
3
When you’re finished press TOP MENU to  
return to the reception display.  
• While listening to FM radio, press AUTO/  
ALC/DIRECT for Neural THX listening.  
See About Neural – THX Surround on page 114  
for more on this.  
Listening to the radio  
The following steps show you how to tune in to  
FM and AM radio broadcasts using the  
automatic (search) and manual (step) tuning  
functions. If you already know the frequency of  
the station you want, see Tuning directly to a  
station below. Once you are tuned to a station  
you can memorize the frequency for recall  
later—see Saving station presets on page 52  
for more on how to do this.  
The Neural THX mode can be selected also  
with STANDARD.  
Tuning directly to a station  
Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of  
the station you want to listen to. In this case, you  
can simply enter the frequency directly using  
the number buttons on the remote control.  
1
Press TUNER to select the tuner.  
1
2
Press TUNER to select the tuner.  
2
Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM),  
Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM),  
if necessary.  
Each press switches the band between FM and  
AM.  
if necessary.  
Each press switches the band between FM and  
AM.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
05  
Basic playback  
3
4
Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).  
2
Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).  
The display shows PRESET NAME, then a  
blinking cursor at the first character position.  
Use the number buttons to enter the  
frequency of the radio station.  
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0,  
6, 0, 0.  
3
Input the name you want.  
Choose from the following characters for a  
name up to eight characters long.  
If you make a mistake halfway through, press  
D.ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and  
start over.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
Saving station presets  
!”#$%&’()+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]^_{|} ˜ [space]  
If you often listen to a particular radio station,  
it’s convenient to have the receiver store the  
frequency for easy recall whenever you want to  
listen to that station. This saves the effort of  
manually tuning in each time. This receiver can  
memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven  
banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each.  
When saving an FM frequency, the MPX  
setting (see page 51) is also stored.  
Use / to select a character, / to set the  
position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.  
Tip  
• To erase a station name, simply repeat  
steps 1 to 3 and input eight spaces instead  
of a name.  
• Once you have named a station preset, you  
can press DISP when listening to a station  
to switch the display between name and  
frequency.  
1
Tune to a station you want to memorize.  
See Listening to the radio on page 51 for more  
on this.  
2
Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).  
Listening to station presets  
The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a  
blinking memory class.  
You will need to have some presets stored to do  
this. See Saving station presets above if you  
haven’t done this already.  
3
Press CLASS to select one of the seven  
classes, then press PRESET / to select the  
station preset you want.  
1
Press TUNER to select the tuner.  
You can also use the number buttons to select  
a station preset.  
2
Press CLASS to select the class in which  
the station is stored.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.  
4
Press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and  
number stop blinking and the receiver stores  
the station.  
3
Press PRESET / to select the station  
preset you want.  
• You can also use the number buttons on the  
remote control to recall the station preset.  
Naming station presets  
For easier identification, you can name your  
station presets.  
1
Choose the station preset you want to  
name.  
See Listening to station presets below for how  
to do this.  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Listening to your system  
06  
Chapter 6:  
Listening to your system  
Important  
Tip  
• The listening modes and many features  
described in this section may not be  
available depending on the current source,  
settings and status of the receiver.  
parameter in Setting the Audio options on  
page 64.  
Auto playback  
Listening in surround sound  
There are many ways to listen back to sources  
using this receiver, but for the simplest, most  
direct listening option is the Auto Surround  
feature. The receiver automatically detects what  
kind of source you’re playing and selects  
Using this receiver, you can listen to any  
source in surround sound. However, the  
options available will depend on your speaker  
setup and the type of source you’re listening to.  
If you connected surround back speakers, see  
also Using surround back channel processing  
on page 56.  
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.1  
While listening to a source, press  
, then press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT)2 for  
auto playback of a source.  
Standard surround sound  
The following modes provide basic surround  
3
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display  
before showing the decoding or playback  
format. Check the digital format indicators in  
the front panel display to see how the source is  
being processed.  
sound for stereo and multichannel sources.  
While listening to a source, press  
RECEIVER  
, then press STANDARD  
STANDARD SURROUND).  
(
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a  
• When listening to the FM radio, the Neural  
THX feature is selected automatically (see  
Using Neural THX on page 51 for more on  
this).  
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby  
format will automatically be selected and  
4
In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this  
receiver equalizes playback sound levels.  
shows in the display.  
Note  
1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see  
Listening in surround sound above for more on these decoding formats).  
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones.  
2 For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 56.  
3 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.  
4 If surround back channel processing (page 56) is switched OFF, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this  
happens automatically if the Surround back speaker setting on page 94 is set to anything but Normal), 2 Pro Logic  
IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
06  
Listening to your system  
With two channel sources, you can select from:  
Using the Advanced surround effects  
The Advanced surround effects can be used for  
a variety of additional surround sound effects.  
Most Advanced Surround modes are designed  
to be used with film soundtracks, but some  
modes are also suited for music sources. Try  
different settings with various soundtracks to  
see which you like.  
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE Up to 7.1 channel  
sound, especially suited to movie sources  
2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC Up to 7.1 channel  
1
sound, especially suited to music sources  
2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel  
sound, especially suited to video games  
2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround  
sound (sound from the surround speakers  
is mono)  
Press RECEIVER , then press ADV SURR  
(
ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to  
select a listening mode.4  
Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound,  
especially suited to movie sources  
ACTION – Designed for action movies with  
dynamic soundtracks  
Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound,  
DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of  
dialog  
2
especially suited to music sources  
Neural THX – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with  
lots of special effects  
3
especially suited to music sources  
With multichannel sources, if you have  
connected surround back speaker(s) and have  
selected SBch ON, you can select (according to  
format):  
MONO FILM – Creates surround sound  
from mono soundtracks  
ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources  
EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo  
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only  
available when you’re using two surround  
back speakers)  
5
field  
TV SURROUND – Provides surround  
sources  
2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above  
Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back  
channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and  
provides pure decoding for 6.1 channel  
sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)  
ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video  
games  
CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-  
type sound  
DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel  
playback with DTS-ES encoded sources  
ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound  
for rock and/or pop music  
DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel  
playback with DTS encoded sources  
Note  
1 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can  
adjust: C.WIDTH, DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 64 to adjust them.  
2 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image  
effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 64).  
3 Neural THX can be selected for 2-channel signals for which the input signal is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital,  
DTS or analog 2-channel sources.  
4 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back  
speakers in your setup. For more on this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 56.  
• If you press ADV SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURROUND mode will automatically  
be selected.  
5 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital  
sources).  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Listening to your system  
06  
UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic  
music sources  
Advance  
EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to  
a stereo source, using all of your speakers  
The Front Stage Surround Advance function  
allows you to create natural surround sound  
effects using just the front speakers and the  
subwoofer.  
PHONES SURR. – When listening through  
headphones, you can still get the effect of  
overall surround.  
While listening to a source, press  
Tip  
RECEIVER , then press STEREO to select Front  
Stage Surround Advance modes.  
STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for  
more on this.  
• When an Advanced Surround listening  
mode is selected, the effect level can be  
adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in  
Setting the Audio options on page 64.  
F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich  
surround sound effect directed to the  
center of where the front left and right  
speakers sound projection area converges.  
Listening in stereo  
When you select STEREO, you will hear the  
source through just the front left and right  
speakers (and possibly your subwoofer  
depending on your speaker settings). Dolby  
Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro multichannel  
sources are downmixed to stereo.  
F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a  
surround sound effect to a wider area than  
WIDE position  
Frontright Front left  
speaker speaker  
Frontright  
speaker  
Front left  
speaker  
While listening to a source, press  
RECEIVER , then press STEREO for stereo  
playback.  
Press repeatedly to switch between:  
STEREO – The audio is heard with your  
surround settings and you can still use the  
Midnight, Loudness, and Tone functions.  
F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage  
Surround Advance below for more on this.  
F.S.SURR WIDE See Using Front Stage  
Surround Advance below for more on this.  
Note  
1 When using F.S.SURR WIDE, a better effect can be obtained if the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced  
MCACC is performed. For more on this, refer to Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on  
page 37.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
06  
Listening to your system  
Using Stream Direct  
Using surround back channel  
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want  
to hear the truest possible reproduction of a  
source. All unnecessary signal processing is  
bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog  
or digital sound source.  
• Default setting: SBch ON  
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1  
or 7.1 decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for  
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you  
can choose to always use 6.1 or 7.1 decoding  
(for example, with 5.1 encoded material). With  
5.1 encoded sources, a surround back channel  
will be generated, but the material may sound  
better in the 5.1 format for which it was  
originally encoded (in which case, you can  
simply switch surround back channel  
processing off).  
While listening to a source, press  
, then press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select  
(
the mode you want.  
Check the digital format indicators in the front  
panel display to see how the source is being  
processed.  
AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on  
page 53.  
• With a 7.1-channel surround system, audio  
signals that have undergone matrix  
decoding processing through surround  
back channel processing to which the Up  
Mix function is added are output from the  
surround back speakers.  
ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode  
(page 53).  
DIRECT – Sources are heard according to  
the settings made in the Surround Setup  
(speaker setting, channel level, speaker  
distance, acoustic calibration EQ, and X-  
curve), as well as with dual mono, the input  
attenuator, and any sound delay settings.  
You will hear sources according to the  
number of channels in the signal.  
Press RECEIVER , then press SBch  
repeatedly to cycle the surround back  
channel options.  
Each press cycles through the options as  
follows:  
PURE DIRECT – Analog sources are heard  
without any digital processing. No sound is  
output from the Speaker B in this mode.  
SBch ON Matrix decoding processing for  
generating the surround back component  
from the surround component is turned on.  
SBch AUTO – Matrix decoding processing  
for generating the surround back  
component from the surround component  
is switched automatically. Matrix decoding  
processing is only performed when  
surround back channel signals are  
detected in the input signals.  
SBch OFF Matrix decoding processing for  
generating the surround back component  
from the surround component is turned off.  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Listening to your system  
06  
• Using the Up Mix function is effective when  
the speakers in the 7.1-channel surround  
system are set up as recommended in the  
example on page 17.  
Using the Virtual Surround Back  
mode  
• Default setting: ON  
When you’re not using surround back  
• Depending on the positions of the speakers  
and the sound source, in some cases it  
may not be possible to achieve good  
speakers, selecting this mode allows you to  
hear a virtual surround back channel through  
your surround speakers. You can choose to  
listen to sources with no surround back  
channel information, or if the material sounds  
better in the format (for example, 5.1) for which  
it was originally encoded, you can have the  
receiver only apply this effect to 6.1 encoded  
results. In this case, set the setting to OFF.  
Up Mix OFF  
Up Mix ON  
SW  
C
SW  
C
FL  
SL  
FR  
SR  
FL  
SL  
FR  
SR  
1
sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.  
Press SBch repeatedly to cycle the virtual  
?
surround back channel options.  
Each press cycles through the options as  
follows:  
SBL  
SBR  
SBL  
SBR  
1
2
Switch the receiver into standby.  
While holding down ENTER on the front  
VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is  
always used (for example, on 5.1 encoded  
material)  
panel, press STANDBY/ON  
.
VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back  
is automatically applied to 6.1 encoded  
sources (for example, Dolby Digital EX or  
DTS-ES)  
The display shows RESET NO .  
Use TUNE +/– (or / on the remote control)  
to select UP MIX ON , and then use  
PRESET +/– (or / on the remote control) to  
select ON or OFF.  
VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back  
mode is switched off  
3
Press ENTER to confirm.  
• When set to ON, the UP MIX indicator on  
the front panel lights.  
Setting the Up Mix function  
In a 7.1-channel surround system with  
surround speakers placed directly at the sides  
of the listening position, the surround sound of  
5.1-channel sources is heard from the side. The  
Up Mix function mixes the sound of the  
surround speakers with the surround back  
speakers so that the surround sound is heard  
2
from diagonally to the rear as it should be.  
Note  
1 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of  
the stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance or Stream Direct mode is selected.  
• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO  
or if Front Bi-Amp, Speaker B or Zone 2 is selected at Surr Back System.  
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.  
2 • Set to ON regardless of this setting when playing DTS-HD signals.  
• May automatically be set to OFF even when set to ON, depending on the input signal and listening mode.  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
06  
Listening to your system  
Each press cycles through the options as  
follows:  
Selecting MCACC presets  
• Default setting: MEMORY 1  
AUTO – The receiver selects the first  
available signal in the following order:  
HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.  
If you have calibrated your system for different  
1
listening positions , you can switch between  
settings to suit the kind of source you’re  
listening to and where you’re sitting (for  
example, watching movies from a sofa, or  
playing a video game close to the TV).  
ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.  
DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial  
digital signal.  
4
HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.  
While listening to a source, press  
, then press MCACC  
5
PCM – For PCM input signals. The  
.
RECEIVER  
receiver selects the first available signal in  
the following order: HDMI; DIGITAL.  
Press repeatedly to select one of the six  
2
MCACC presets .  
When set to DIGITAL or AUTO, the indicators  
light according to the signal being decoded, as  
follows:  
See Data Management on page 91 to check  
and manage your current settings.  
2 DIGITAL lights with Dolby Digital  
decoding.  
Choosing the input signal  
On this receiver, it is possible to switch the  
input signals for the different inputs as  
2 DIGITAL PLUS lights with Dolby Digital  
Plus decoding.  
3
described below.  
2 TrueHD lights with Dolby TrueHD  
decoding.  
Press RECEIVER , then press SIGNAL SEL  
to select the input signal corresponding to  
the source component.  
DTS lights with DTS decoding.  
DTS HD lights with DTS-HD decoding.  
MSTR lights with DTS-HD Master Audio  
decoding.  
96/24 lights with DTS 96/24 decoding.  
Note  
1 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how  
you’re using your system. These presets can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on  
page 37 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 78, either of which you should have already completed.  
2 • These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.  
• You can also press / to select the MCACC preset.  
3 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96/24) and WMA9 Pro  
digital signal formats. The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, WMA9 Pro, PCM (32  
kHz to 192 kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio, SACD and DVD Audio  
(including 192 kHz). With other digital signal formats, set to ANALOG (the MULTI CH IN and TUNER).  
• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise,  
make the proper digital connections (page 29) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.  
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your  
DVD player.  
4 When the HDMI option in Setting the Audio options on page 64 is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through  
your TV, not from this receiver.  
5 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.  
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input  
signal if this is a problem.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Listening to your system  
06  
WMA9 Pro lights to indicate that a WMA9  
Pro signal is being decoded.  
HDMI is not assigned by default. To select  
an HDMI signal, conduct the input setup  
procedure (see The Input Setup menu on  
page 39).  
Better sound using Phase  
Control  
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses  
phase correction measures to make sure your  
sound source arrives at the listening position  
in phase, preventing unwanted distortion and/  
or coloring of the sound.  
Phase Control technology provides coherent  
sound reproduction through the use of phase  
1
matching for an optimal sound image. The  
default setting is on and we recommend  
leaving Phase Control switched on for all  
sound sources.  
Press RECEIVER , then press PHASE CTRL  
(PHASE CONTROL) to switch on phase  
correction.  
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front  
panel lights.  
Note  
1 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’,  
they crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest  
of a wave meets a trough, then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.  
• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.  
• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually  
feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer  
to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.  
• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff  
frequency to a higher value.  
• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.  
• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:  
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.  
– When the MULTI CH IN input is selected.  
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 64.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
07  
KURO LINK  
Chapter 7  
KURO LINK  
Synchronized operation with a KURO LINK-  
compatible Pioneer flat panel TV or Blu-ray disc  
player or with a component of another make  
that supports the KURO LINK function is  
possible when the component is connected to  
the receiver using an HDMI cable.  
Making the KURO LINK  
connections  
You can use synchronized operation for a  
connected flat panel TV and up to four (VSX-  
1019AH model)/three (VSX-919AH model) other  
components.  
For details about concrete operations, settings,  
etc., refer to also the operating instructions for  
each component.  
Be sure to connect the flat panel TV’s audio  
cable to the audio input of this unit.  
• You cannot use this function with  
components that do not support KURO  
LINK.  
For details, see Connecting your TV and  
playback components on page 23.  
• We do not guarantee this receiver will work  
with Pioneer KURO LINK-compatible  
components or components of other makes  
that support the KURO LINK function. We  
do not guarantee that all synchronized  
operations will work with components of  
other makes that support the KURO LINK  
function.  
Important  
• When connecting this system or changing  
connections, be sure to switch the power  
off and disconnect the power cord from the  
wall socket.  
After completing all connections, connect  
the power cords to the wall socket.  
• Use a High Speed HDMI™ cable when you  
want to use the KURO LINK function. The  
KURO LINK function may not work  
properly if a different type of HDMI cable is  
used.  
• After this receiver is connected to an AC  
outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI  
initialization process begins. You cannot  
carry out any operations during  
initialization. The HDMI indicator on the  
display unit blinks during initialization, and  
you can turn this receiver on once it has  
stopped blinking.  
• To get the most out of this function, we  
recommend that you connect your HDMI  
component not to a flat panel TV but rather  
directly to the HDMI terminal on this  
receiver.  
• While the receiver is equipped with four  
(VSX-1019AH model)/three (VSX-919AH  
model) HDMI inputs, the KURO LINK  
function can only be used with up to three  
DVD or Blu-ray disc players or up to three  
DVD or Blu-ray disc recorders.  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
KURO LINK  
07  
Cautions on the KURO LINK function  
• Connect the TV directly to this receiver.  
Interrupting a direct connection with other  
amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI  
switch) can cause operational errors.  
About connections with a product of  
a different brand that supports the  
KURO LINK function  
The synchronized operations below can be  
used when the receiver’s KURO LINK function  
is connected to a TV of a brand other than  
Pioneer that supports the KURO LINK  
function. (Depending on the TV, however,  
some of the KURO LINK functions may not  
work.)  
• Only connect components (Blu-ray disc  
player, etc.) you intend to use as a source  
to the HDMI input of this receiver.  
Interrupting a direct connection with other  
amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI  
switch) can cause operational errors.  
• You can set whether to output the sound  
over the speakers connected to the  
receiver or over the TV’s speakers using the  
TV’s menu screen.  
• When KURO LINK is set to ON, HDMI  
Input is automatically set to OFF.  
• If a listening mode other than AUTO  
SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT, PURE DIRECT  
or STEREO is selected while the PQLS  
effect is enabled, the PQLS effect is  
disabled.  
• You can adjust the receiver’s volume or  
mute the sound using the TV’s remote  
control.  
• When the TV’s power is set to standby, the  
receiver’s power is also set to standby.  
(Only when the input for a component  
connected to the receiver by HDMI  
connection is selected or when watching  
the TV)  
• When this receiver is connected by HDMI  
cable to a Pioneer player that is compatible  
with the PQLS function via HDMI  
connection and a CD is played or HDMI  
reauthentication is performed (the HDMI  
indicator blinks), the PQLS effect is  
enabled and the listening mode is set to  
AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode  
other than AUTO SURROUND, ALC,  
DIRECT, PURE DIRECT or STEREO is  
selected.  
• The sound of TV programs or an external  
input connected to the TV can also be  
output from the speakers connected to the  
receiver. (This requires connection of an  
optical digital cable, etc., in addition to the  
HDMI cable.)  
• When the receiver’s KURO LINK is turned  
ON, even if the receiver’s power is in the  
standby mode, it is possible to output the  
audio and video signals from a player via  
HDMI to the TV without producing sound  
from the receiver, but only when a KURO  
LINK-compatible component (Blu-ray disc  
player, etc.) and compatible TV are  
The synchronized operations below can be  
used when the receiver’s KURO LINK function  
is connected to a player or recorder of a brand  
other than Pioneer that supports the KURO  
LINK function.  
• When playback starts on the player or  
recorder, the receiver’s input switches to  
the HDMI input to which that component is  
connected.  
connected. In this case, the receiver’s  
power turns on and the power and HDMI  
indicators light.  
See the Pioneer website for the latest  
information on the models of non-Pioneer  
brands and products that support the KURO  
LINK function.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
07  
KURO LINK  
5
Select the ‘Display Power Off’ setting  
you want.  
KURO LINK Setup  
If the TV’s power is turned off while using the  
KURO LINK function, the receiver’s power is  
also turned off (all power off function). This  
function can be disabled.  
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as  
well as KURO LINK-compatible connected  
components in order to make use of the KURO  
LINK function. For more information see the  
operating instructions for each component.  
YES – The all power off function is enabled.  
The receiver’s power turns off together with  
the TV’s power.  
This function only works when the input for  
a component connected to the receiver by  
HDMI connection is selected or when  
watching the TV.  
1
2
3
Press RECEIVER , then press Home Menu  
Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER  
.
.
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER  
.
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON
5. Volume Li
6. Remote Con
NO – The all power off function is disabled.  
The receiver’s power is not affected when  
the TV’s power is turned off.  
4d1.KURO LINK Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
7. Flicker Red
KURO LINK  
:
:
ON  
YES  
Display Power Off  
6
When you’re finished, press HOME MENU.  
Exit  
You will finish to HOME MENU.  
Exit  
Finish  
Setting the PQLS function  
PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a  
digital audio signal transfer control technology  
using the KURO LINK function. It offers higher-  
quality audio playback by controlling audio  
signals from the receiver to a PQLS compatible  
player, etc. This enables removing jitter that  
has a negative effect on the quality of the  
sound and is generated upon transmission.  
4
Select the ‘KURO LINK’ setting you want.  
Choose whether to set this unit’s KURO LINK  
function ON or OFF. You will need to set it to  
ON to use the KURO LINK function.  
When using a component that does not  
support the KURO LINK function, set this to  
OFF.  
ON – Enables the KURO LINK function.  
When this unit’s power is turned off and  
you have a supported source begin  
playback while using the KURO LINK  
function, the audio and video output from  
the HDMI connection are output from the  
flat panel TV.  
This function is activated when KURO LINK is  
set to ON.  
1
Press  
, then press PQLS to  
RECEIVER  
select PQLS setting.  
The setting is displayed on the front panel  
display.  
OFF – The KURO LINK is disabled.  
Synchronized operations cannot be used.  
When this unit’s power is turned off, audio  
and video of sources connected via HDMI  
are not output.  
PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A  
precision quartz controller in this receiver  
eliminates distortion caused by timing  
errors (jitter), giving you the best possible  
digital-to-analog conversion from audio CD  
sources when you use the HDMI interface.  
This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLS-  
compatible players.  
PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
KURO LINK  
07  
• The receiver’s input switches automatically  
when the KURO LINK-compatible  
component is played.  
Before using synchronization  
Once you have finished all connections and  
settings, you must:  
• The receiver’s input switches automatically  
when the TV’s channel is switched.  
1
Put all components into standby mode.  
• The synchronized amp mode remains in  
effect even if the receiver’s input is  
switched to a component other than one  
connected by HDMI.  
2
Turn the power on for all components,  
with the power for the flat panel TV being  
turned on last.  
The operations below can also be used on  
3
Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is  
Pioneer KURO LINK-compatible flat panel TVs.  
connected to this receiver, and see if video  
output from connected components displays  
properly on the screen or not.  
• When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or  
the sound is muted, the volume status is  
displayed on the flat panel TV’s screen.  
4
Check whether the components  
• When the OSD language is switched on  
the flat panel TV, the receiver’s language  
setting also switches accordingly.  
connected to all HDMI inputs are properly  
displayed.  
Synchronized amp mode  
Canceling synchronized amp mode  
• When the synchronized amp mode is  
canceled, the receiver’s power turns off if  
you were viewing an HDMI input or a TV  
program on the TV.  
The synchronized amp mode can be set from  
the KURO LINK-compatible TV’s remote  
control. See the explanation below for  
operations in the synchronized amp mode.  
These functions are set from the TV’s menu  
screen. For more information, refer to the  
operating instructions of the KURO LINK-  
compatible TV.  
• When in the synchronized amp mode, the  
synchronized amp mode is canceled when  
the receiver’s power is turned off. To turn  
the synchronized amp mode back on,  
select the synchronized amp mode using  
the TV’s remote control.  
Synchronized amp mode operations  
When using the synchronized amp mode, the  
KURO LINK-compatible component  
connected to the receiver operates in sync as  
described below.  
• When in the synchronized amp mode, the  
synchronized amp mode is canceled if an  
operation that produces sound from the TV  
is performed from the TV’s menu screen,  
etc.  
• The receiver’s volume can be set and the  
sound can be muted using the TV’s remote  
control.  
• When the TV’s power is set to standby, the  
receiver’s power is also set to standby.  
(Only when the input for a component  
connected to the receiver by HDMI  
connection is selected or when watching  
the TV)  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
08  
Using other functions  
Chapter 8:  
Using other functions  
Setting the Audio options  
RECEIVER  
, then press AUDIO  
There are a number of additional sound  
settings you can make using the AUDIO  
PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated,  
are listed in bold.  
1
Press  
PARAMETER  
.
2
Use / to select the setting you want to  
adjust.  
Depending on the current status/mode of the  
receiver, certain options may not be able to be  
selected. Check the table below for notes on  
this.  
Important  
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the  
AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is  
unavailable due to the current source,  
settings and status of the receiver.  
3
Use / to set it as necessary.  
See the table below for the options available for  
each setting.  
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the  
menu.  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
MCACC  
Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when multiple preset M1. MEMORY 1 to  
(MCACC preset)  
memories are saved. When a MCACC preset memory has been  
renamed, the given name is displayed.  
M6. MEMORY 6  
Default:  
M1. MEMORY 1  
EQ  
Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro.  
ON  
(Acoustic  
Calibration EQ)  
a
OFF  
S-WAVE  
(Standing Wave)  
Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control.  
ON  
OFF  
DELAY  
(Sound Delay)  
Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the  
soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding  
a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation  
of the video.  
0.0 to 10.0 (frames)  
1 second = 30  
frames (NTSC)  
Default: 0.0  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
Allows you to hear effective surround sound of movies at low  
volumes.  
MIDNIGHT/  
LOUDNESS OFF  
MIDNIGHT ON  
LOUDNESS ON  
Used to get good bass and treble from music sources at low  
volumes.  
b
Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, or bypasses  
them completely.  
BYPASS  
TONE  
(Tone Control)  
ON  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using other functions  
08  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
–6 to +6 (dB)  
c
Adjusts the amount of bass.  
BASS  
Default: 0 (dB)  
–6 to +6 (dB)  
Default: 0 (dB)  
c
Adjusts the amount of treble.  
TREBLE  
S.RTRV  
d
With the Sound Retriever function, DSP processing is used to  
compensate for the loss of audio data upon compression,  
improving the sound’s sense of density and modulation.  
OFF  
(Sound Retriever)  
ON  
DNR  
(Digital Noise  
Reduction)  
May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for example,  
video tape with lots of background noise) when switched on.  
OFF  
ON  
DIALOG E.  
(Dialog  
Enhancement)  
Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from  
other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack.  
OFF  
ON  
DUAL  
(Dual Mono)  
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks  
should be played. Dual mono is not widely used, but is sometimes  
necessary when two languages need to be sent to separate  
channels.  
CH1 – Channel 1 is  
heard only  
CH2 – Channel 2 is  
heard only  
CH1 CH2 Both  
channels heard from  
front speakers  
e
DRC  
(Dynamic Range  
Control)  
Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks  
optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby  
TrueHD, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio (you may need to use  
this feature when listening to surround sound at low volumes).  
AUTO  
MAX  
MID  
OFF  
LFE  
Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra-low bass 0dB/ –5dB/ –10dB/  
(LFE Attenuate)  
tones. Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra-low  
bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers.  
–15dB/ –20dB  
OFF  
The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB, which is the  
recommended value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB, –15 dB or –20  
dB, the LFE is limited by the respective degree. When OFF is  
selected, no sound is output from the LFE channel.  
f
Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic range  
(during digital processing).  
0dB  
SACD GAIN  
+6 dB  
g
Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver  
(amp) or through to a TV or flat panel TV. When THROUGH is  
selected, no sound is output from this receiver.  
AMPLIFIER  
THROUGH  
HDMI  
(HDMI Audio)  
A. DELAY  
(Auto delay)  
This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay  
between components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio  
delay time is set depending on the operational status of the  
display connected with an HDMI cable. The video delay time is  
OFF  
ON  
h
automatically adjusted according to the audio delay time.  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
08  
Using other functions  
Setting  
C. WIDTH  
(Center Width)  
(Applicable only  
when using a center  
speaker)  
What it does  
Option(s)  
0 to 7  
i
Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the  
center channel between the front right and left speakers, making  
it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings).  
Default: 3  
DIMENSIONi  
Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to  
back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more  
forward (positive settings).  
–3 to +3  
Default: 0  
PANORAMAi  
Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers  
for a ‘wraparound’ effect.  
OFF  
ON  
j
Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect with  
vocals. Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to front  
right and left speakers) to 10 (center channel sent to the center  
speaker only).  
0 to 10  
C. IMAGE  
(Center Image)  
(Applicable only  
when using a center  
speaker)  
Defaults:  
Neo:6 MUSIC: 3  
EFFECT  
Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced Surround  
or ALC mode (each mode can be set separately).  
10 to 90  
a.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light.  
b.This setting is only displayed when the listening mode is Stereo, Auto surround (STEREO) or ALC (STEREO).  
c.The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.  
d.With the iPod/USB input function, by default S.RTRV is set to ON.  
e.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby  
TrueHD.  
f. You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the  
gain setting back to 0 dB.  
g.• HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations.  
• The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input signals  
from the TV with the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See Synchronized amp mode on page 63.  
h.This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability  
(‘lipsync’) for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A. DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay  
time manually. For more details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer directly.  
i. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.  
j. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA mode.  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
08  
Setting the Video options  
RECEIVER  
, then press VIDEO  
There are a number of additional picture  
settings you can make using the VIDEO  
PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated,  
are listed in bold.  
1
Press  
PARAMETER  
.
2
Use / to select the setting you want to  
adjust.  
Depending on the current status/mode of the  
receiver, certain options may not be able to be  
selected. Check the table below for notes on  
this.  
Important  
• Note that if an option cannot be selected  
on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is  
unavailable due to the current source,  
setting and status of the receiver.  
3
Use / to set it as necessary.  
See the table below for the options available for  
1
• These functions do not affect HDMI inputs.  
each setting.  
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the  
menu.  
Setting  
What it does  
Converts video signals for output from the MONITOR OUT jacks  
Option(s)  
ON  
V. CONV  
(Digital Video Conversion) (including HDMI OUT connector) for all video types (see page 22).  
OFF  
a
Specifies the output resolution of the video signal (when analog  
video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT connector, select  
this according to the resolution of your monitor and the images  
you wish to watch).  
AUTO  
PURE  
RES (Resolution)  
*VSX-1019AH model only  
480p/576p  
720p  
1080i  
1080p  
b
Specifies the aspect ratio when analog video input signals are  
output at the HDMI output. Make your desired settings while  
checking each setting on your display (if the image doesn’t match  
your monitor type, cropping or black bands appear).  
THROUGH  
NORMAL  
ASP (Aspect)  
*VSX-1019AH model only  
c,d  
480i/576i analog video signals are converted to progressive  
signals for output.  
AUTO  
ON  
IP CONV  
(I/P Converter)  
When set to AUTO, the signals are output with the optimum  
setting for the connected display by HDMI.  
*VSX-919AH model only  
OFF  
When set to ON, the signals are up-converted to 480p/576p for  
output.  
When set to OFF, the signals are not converted for output.  
Note  
1 • All of the setting items can be set for each input function.  
• Setting items other than V. CONV can only be selected when V. CONV is set to ON.  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
08  
Using other functions  
Setting  
PCINEMA  
What it does  
Option(s)  
AUTO  
PAL  
c,e  
This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video  
output is set to progressive. Usually set to AUTO; but try  
switching to OFF if the picture appears unnatural.  
(PureCinema)  
OFF  
Additionally, certain PAL movie video (576i, 25 frames/second  
STB video output or DVD disc playback, etc.) that contain film  
progressive material cannot be recognized as such by this  
receiver. In such instances, if you choose PAL, PureCinema mode  
is activated.  
c
Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is  
set to progressive.  
–4 to +4  
Default: 0  
0 to +8  
P.MOTION  
(Progressive Motion)  
c
Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y  
(brightness) component.  
YNR  
Default: 0  
–4 to +4  
Default: 0  
–4 to +4  
Default: 0  
–6 to +6  
Default: 0  
–6 to +6  
Default: 0  
–6 to +6  
Default: 0  
–6 to +6  
Default: 0  
c
Adjusts how sharp edges appear.  
DETAIL  
c,f  
Adjusts the sharpness of the high-frequency (detailed) elements  
in the picture.  
SHARP  
(Sharpness)  
c
Adjusts the overall brightness.  
BRIGHT  
(Brightness)  
c
Adjusts the contrast between light and dark.  
Adjusts the red/green balance.  
CONTRAST  
c
HUE  
c
Adjusts saturation from dull to bright.  
CHROMA  
(Chroma Level)  
a.• When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some cases  
no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change the setting.  
• When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV (monitor)  
connected by HDMI. When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same resolution as when input (At this  
time, video signals are only output from the same type of terminals to which they were input).  
• When a display is connected by HDMI, if this is set to something other than PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are  
input, 480p/576p signals are output from the component output terminals.  
b.• If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the monitor.  
NORMAL setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video signals are being input.  
c.This setting is only displayed when 480i or 576i video signals are being input.  
d.If the picture does not display properly when AUTO or PAL is selected, select OFF.  
e.If the picture does not display properly when PAL is selected, select AUTO or OFF.  
f. This setting is ineffective for HDMI output, from composite and component video inputs.  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
08  
Switching the speaker system  
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls  
If you selected Speaker B in Surround back  
speaker setting on page 94, three speaker  
system settings are possible using SPEAKERS.  
If you selected Normal, Front Bi-Amp or  
ZONE 2, the button will simply switch your  
main speaker system on or off. The options  
The following steps use the front panel controls  
to adjust the sub zone volume and select  
sources. See MULTI-ZONE remote controls on  
page 70.  
1
Press the MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF button  
on the front panel.  
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:  
1
below are for the Speaker B setting only.  
Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to  
ZONE 2 ON – Switches the MULTI-ZONE  
feature on  
select a speaker system setting.  
As mentioned above, if you have selected  
Normal, the button will simply switch your  
main speaker system (A) on or off.  
MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-  
ZONE feature off  
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the  
MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.  
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system  
option:  
2
Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the  
SPA – Sound is output from speaker  
system A and the same signal is output  
from the pre-out terminals.  
front panel.  
2
• When the receiver is on, make sure that  
while ZONE 2 shows in the display. If this is  
not showing, the front panel controls affect  
the main zone only.  
SPB – Sound is output from the two  
speakers connected to speaker system B.  
Multichannel sources will not be heard.  
The same signal is output from the  
surround back channel pre-out terminals.  
3
Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select  
SPAB – Sound is output from speaker  
system A (up to 5 channels, depending on  
the source), the two speakers in speaker  
system B, and the subwoofer. The sound  
from speaker system B will be the same as  
the sound from speaker system A  
the source for the sub zone.  
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source  
connected to the CD-R inputs to the sub room  
(ZONE 2).  
controls to select a preset station (see  
Saving station presets on page 52 if you’re  
(multichannel sources will be downmixed  
to 2 channels).  
3
unsure how to do this).  
SP(off) – No sound is output from the  
speakers. The same sound is output from  
the pre-out terminals (including from your  
subwoofer, if connected) as when  
VSX-919AH model only: iPod/USB and  
SIRIUS Radio function cannot be selected  
for the MULTI-ZONE feature.  
selecting speaker system A (above).  
Note  
1 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 94. However, if SPB is  
selected above, no sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).  
• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 94 output from the surround back pre-out  
terminals may change.  
• All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.  
2 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE 2 DVD for example shows in the display.  
3 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also  
changes the station in the other zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
08  
Using other functions  
4
Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust  
the volume for the sub zone.  
recording  
This is only possible if you selected the  
Variable volume control in ZONE Audio Setup  
You can make an audio or a video recording  
from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or  
video source connected to the receiver (such  
1
on page 99.  
5
When you’re finished, press MULTI-ZONE  
3
as a CD player or TV).  
CONTROL again to return to the main zone  
controls.  
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital  
recording from an analog source or vice-versa,  
so make sure the components you are  
recording to/from are hooked up in the same  
way (see Connecting your equipment on  
page 14 for more on connections).  
You can also press the MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF  
button on the front panel to switch off all  
2
output to the sub zone.  
MULTI-ZONE remote controls  
Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2  
to operate the corresponding zone.  
Since the video converter is not available when  
making recordings (from the video OUT jacks)  
make sure to use the same type of video cable  
for connecting your recorder as you used to  
connect your video source (the one you want to  
record) to this receiver. For example, you must  
connect your recorder using Component video  
if your source has also been connected using  
Component video.  
The following table shows the possible MULTI-  
ZONE remote controls:  
Button  
What it does  
Switches on/off power in the sub  
zone.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
Use to select the input function in  
the sub zone.  
For more information about video connections,  
see Connecting a HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and  
other video sources on page 28.  
Input  
function  
buttons  
Use to select the input function  
directly (this may not work for some  
functions) in the sub zone.  
1
Select the source you want to record.  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
+/–  
Use to set the listening volume in the  
sub zone.  
Use the input function buttons (or INPUT  
SELECT).  
RECEIVER  
• If necessary, press  
, then press  
SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal  
corresponding to the source component  
(see Choosing the input signal on page 58  
for more on this).  
2
Prepare the source you want to record.  
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video,  
DVD etc.  
Note  
1 The volume levels of the main and sub zone are independent.  
2 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.  
• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so  
that this receiver is in standby.  
3 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on  
the recorded signal.  
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.  
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using other functions  
08  
3
Prepare the recorder.  
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the  
recording device and set the recording levels.  
Dimming the display  
You can choose between four brightness levels  
for the front panel display. Note that when  
selecting sources, the display automatically  
brightens for a few seconds.  
Refer to the instructions that came with the  
recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most  
video recorders set the audio recording level  
automatically—check the component’s  
instruction manual if you’re unsure.  
RECEIVER  
, then press DIMMER  
Press  
repeatedly to change the brightness of the  
front panel display.  
4
Start recording, then start playback of the  
source component.  
Checking your system settings  
Reducing the level of an analog  
signal  
Use the status display screen to check your  
current settings for features such as surround  
back channel processing and your current  
MCACC preset.  
The input attenuator lowers the input level of  
an analog signal when it’s too strong. You can  
use this if you find that the OVER indicator  
lights often or you can hear distortion in the  
RECEIVER  
, then press STATUS to  
1
Press  
check the system settings.  
These appear on the front panel display.  
1
3
sound.  
The front panel display shows each of the  
following settings for three seconds each:  
Input function  
RECEIVER  
, then press A.ATT to  
switch the input attenuator on or off.  
Press  
Sampling Frequency  
Using the sleep timer  
The sleep timer switches the receiver into  
standby after a specified amount of time so you  
can fall asleep without worrying about the  
receiver being left on all night. Use the remote  
control to set the sleep timer.  
Surround Back channel Processing  
MCACC preset  
ZONE 2 input  
RECEIVER  
, then press SLEEP  
repeatedly to set the sleep time.  
Press  
KURO LINK  
2
When you’re finished, press STATUS  
60 min  
90 min  
30 min  
Off  
again to switch off the display.  
• You can check the remaining sleep time at  
any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing  
repeatedly will cycle through the sleep  
2
options again.  
Note  
1 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.  
2 • You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.  
• The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.  
3 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
08  
Using other functions  
Resetting the system  
Setting  
KURO LINK  
DSP  
Default  
ON  
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s  
settings to the factory default. Use the front panel  
Surround back channel  
Processing  
ON  
controls to do this. Set MULTI-ZONE to OFF  
.
• Disconnect the iPod and USB memory  
device from the receiver beforehand.  
Phase Control  
ON  
ON  
iPod/USB  
function  
Sound Retriever  
1
2
Switch the receiver into standby.  
Other functions  
OFF  
While holding down ENTER on the front  
Sound Delay  
Dual Mono  
DRC  
0.0 frame  
CH1  
panel, press STANDBY/ON  
The display shows RESET NO .  
.
AUTO  
0 dB  
0 dB  
OFF  
SACD Gain  
LFE Attenuate  
Auto delay  
UP Mix  
3
Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET +/–, then  
press ENTER on the front panel.  
The display shows RESET? OK.  
ON  
4
Press ENTER to confirm.  
Digital Safety  
Effect Level  
OFF  
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver  
has been reset to the factory default settings.  
ExtendedStereo 90  
Other modes  
2 PL II Music Center Width  
50  
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if  
the receiver is unplugged.  
3
Options  
Dimension  
Panorama  
0
OFF  
Default system settings  
Neo:6 Options Center Image  
Neo:6 MUSIC: 3  
Neo:6 CINEMA: 10  
Setting  
Default  
ON  
Digital Video Conversion  
Listening Mode AUTO  
SPEAKERS  
(2 ch)  
SURROUND  
Surround Back System  
Normal  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALLx2  
YES  
Listening Mode AUTO  
Speaker System Front  
(x ch)  
SURROUND  
Center  
Listening Mode STEREO  
(HP)  
Surr  
SB  
SW  
See also Setting the Audio options on page 64 for  
other default DSP settings.  
MCACC  
Crossover  
X-Curve  
80 Hz  
MCACC Position Memory  
Channel Level (M1 to M6)  
Speaker Distance (M1 to M6)  
Standing Wave ATT of all  
M1: MEMORY 1  
0.0 dB  
OFF  
DIMMER  
Inputs  
brightest  
10’00”  
0.0 dB  
See Input function default and possible settings on  
(M1 to M6)  
channels/filters  
page 40.  
SWch Wide  
Trim  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
MULTI-ZONE  
Zone 2 Volume Level  
Zone 2 Volume  
HDMI  
Variable  
–60 dB  
EQ Data (M1 to All channels/  
M6)  
bands  
EQ Wide Trim  
HDMI Audio  
Amp  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Controlling the rest of your system  
09  
Chapter 9:  
Controlling the rest of your  
system  
Operating multiple receivers  
Setting the remote to control  
other components  
The remote control included with this receiver  
can be used to operate up to three other  
receivers (of the same model as this receiver)  
in addition to this receiver. The receiver to be  
operated is switched by inputting the preset  
code to set the remote control setting.  
Most components can be assigned to one of  
the input function buttons (such as DVD or  
CD) using the component’s manufacturer  
preset code stored in the remote.  
However, there are cases where only certain  
functions may be controllable after assigning  
the proper preset code, or the codes for the  
manufacturer in the remote control will not  
work for the model that you are using.  
• Set the remote modes on the receivers  
before using this function (see Remote  
Control Mode Setup on page 101).  
1
Check the operation selector switch to  
MAIN  
.
Note  
RECEIVER  
2
3
Press  
.
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by  
pressing  
RECEIVER  
press RETURN.  
Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then  
release it after the LED flashes twice.  
. To go back a step,  
4
Use the number buttons to enter the 5-  
• After one minute of inactivity, the remote  
automatically exits the operation.  
digit preset code (see below).  
• Receiver 1: 6 1 9 3 5 (Default)  
• Receiver 2: 6 2 6 3 0  
• Receiver 3: 6 2 6 3 1  
• Receiver 4: 6 2 6 3 2  
Selecting preset codes directly  
1
Press the input function button for the  
component you want to control.1  
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL,  
press TV CTRL here.  
When the preset code is fully input, the LED  
flashes once to indicate that the setting is  
completed.  
2
Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then  
To operate another receiver, start over from  
step 1 to input its preset code.  
release it after the LED flashes twice.  
3
Use the number buttons to enter the 5-  
digit preset code.  
See Preset code list on page 116.  
Note  
1 You can’t assign RECEIVER , TUNER, iPod/USB or SIRIUS.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
09  
Controlling the rest of your system  
When the preset code is fully input, the LED  
flashes once to indicate that the setting is  
completed.  
Controls the components  
This remote control can control components  
after entering the proper codes or teaching the  
receiver the commands (see Setting the remote  
to control other components on page 73 for  
more on this). Use the input function buttons  
to select the component.  
4
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other  
components you want to control.  
To try out the remote control, switch the  
component on or off (into standby) by pressing  
SOURCE. If it doesn’t seem to work, select  
the next code from the list (if there is one).  
• The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote  
control are dedicated to control the TV  
assigned to the TV CTRL button. If you have  
two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV CTRL  
button.  
Resetting the remote control  
presets  
This will erase all preset remote control preset  
codes and programmed buttons.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
HDMI  
1
Check the operation selector switch to  
.
CD-R  
VIDEO  
MAIN  
iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS  
RECEIVER  
2
3
Press  
.
INPUT  
SELECT  
1
2
3
Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
release it after the LED flashes twice.  
4
5
6
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
7
8
9
4
Use the number buttons to enter 9, 8, 1.  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ENTER  
0
INPUT  
The LED flashes four times to indicate that the  
resetting is completed.  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
TV CONTROL  
Default preset codes  
CH  
VOL  
MUTE  
Input function Preset code  
button  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
DVD  
BD  
3 1 5 7 1  
3 2 4 4 2  
2 2 3 0 6  
3 2 4 4 2  
1 4 0 0 1  
7 0 4 6 8  
7 1 0 8 7  
2 0 0 5 8  
1 4 0 0 1  
6 1 9 3 5  
PRESET  
ENTER  
PRESET  
RETURN  
CATEGORY  
HOME  
MENU  
DVR  
HDMI  
TV  
TUNE  
iPod CTRL  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
HDD  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
CD  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
CD-R  
VIDEO  
TV CTRL  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
RECEIVER  
TV CTRL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
MAIN  
ZONE  
2
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
09  
Button(s)  
TV  
TV (Monitor)  
BD/DVD  
HDD/DVR  
VCR  
SAT/CATV  
SOURCE  
POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Number  
buttons  
numerics  
numerics  
numerics  
numerics  
numerics  
numerics  
(dot)  
(dot)  
KURO LINK  
CH ENTER  
CLEAR  
ENTER  
+
-
-
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
(CLASS)  
EXIT/INFO  
EXIT  
TOP MENU  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
-
-
LIST  
TOOLS/  
USER MENU TOOLS  
GUIDE  
GUIDE/EPG  
///  
///  
///  
///  
ENTER  
///  
-
-
-
///  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU  
HOME/  
MENU  
RETURN  
RETURN  
RETURN  
RETURN  
-
RETURN  
HDD (Red)  
Red  
Red  
-
HDD  
DVD  
VCR  
MENU  
-
Red  
Green  
Yellow  
Blue  
DVD (Green) Green  
Green  
-
-
Yellow  
Yellow  
-
-
(Yellow)  
(Blue)  
Blue  
Blue  
MENU  
-
-
-
-
AUTO SETUP  
-
FREEZE  
-
-
AUDIO  
-
-
ANT  
AV SELECTION  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
-
-
SCREEN SIZE   
-
AUDIO  
DISP  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
-
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY/  
INFO  
CH +/–  
CH+/  
-
CH+/  
-
-
-
CH+/  
-
CH+/  
-
CH+/  
+   
RECORD  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
09  
Controlling the rest of your system  
TV  
(Projector)  
CD/CD-R/  
SACD  
Button(s)  
Button(s)  
LD  
MD/DAT  
TAPE  
SOURCE  
POWER ON  
MOVIE  
SOURCE POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
-
1
Number  
buttons  
numerics  
numerics  
numerics  
2
STANDARD  
DYNAMIC  
USER1  
3
b
(dot)  
+10  
>10/CLEAR CLEAR  
CLEAR  
4
b
ENTER  
ENTER  
DISK/ENTER OPEN/CLOSE ENTER  
5
USER2  
(CLASS)  
6
USER3  
TOP MENU  
-
-
-
-
MS  
7
COLOR+  
SHARP+  
GAMMA  
COLOR  
a
MS  
LEGATO LINK  
8
9
/// ///  
-
-
-
-
-
///  
0
ENTER  
ENTER  
-
-
(dot)  
SHARP  
a
SACD SETUP  
-
ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP  
RETURN  
-
-
-
EXIT  
INFO  
///  
///  
ENTER  
AUDIO  
DISP  
AUDIO  
-
-
ENTER  
TEST  
HIDE  
MENU  
a
PURE AUDIO  
a
HDMI1  
DISPLAY/  
INFO  
TIME  
-
-
HDMI2  
COMP.  
a. Controls for SACD.  
b. Controls for MD.  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
BRIGHT  
BRIGHT+  
POWER OFF  
ASPECT  
CONTRAST+/  
AUDIO  
DISP  
CH +/–  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
Chapter 10:  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
3
Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the  
HOME MENU, then press ENTER  
.
Making receiver settings from  
the Advanced MCACC menu  
HOME MENU  
A/V RECEIVER  
The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel  
1. Advanced MCACC  
2. MCACC Data Check  
3. Data Management  
4. System Setup  
ACoustic Calibration) system was developed in  
Pioneer’s laboratories with the aim of making it  
possible for home users to perform  
adjustments of the same level as in a studio  
easily and with high precision. The acoustic  
characteristics of the listening environment  
are measured and the frequency response is  
calibrated accordingly to allow high precision,  
automatic analysis and optimal calibration of  
the sound field to bring it closer to a studio  
environment than ever before. Furthermore,  
while it was previously difficult to eliminate  
standing waves, this receiver is equipped with  
a standing wave control function using a  
unique process to perform acoustic analysis  
and reduce their influence.  
Exit  
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
1.Advanced MCACC  
a. Full Auto MCACC  
b. Auto MCACC  
c. Manual MCACC  
d. Demo  
Exit  
Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically  
setting up for surround sound (Auto  
MCACC) on page 37 for a quick and  
effective automatic surround setup.  
This section describes how to calibrate the  
sound field automatically and fine-adjust the  
sound field data manually.  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC  
(Expert) on page 78 for a more detailed  
MCACC setup.  
1
Use RECEIVER to switch on.  
• If headphones are connected to the  
receiver, disconnect them.  
Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker  
settings and customize the Acoustic  
Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup  
on page 82).  
2
Press  
on the remote control,  
RECEIVER  
then press HOME MENU 2  
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen  
appears on your TV. Use /// and  
ENTER to navigate through the screens and  
select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm  
and exit the current menu.  
Demo – No settings are saved and no  
errors occur. When the speakers are  
connected to this receiver, the test tone is  
output repeatedly. Press RETURN to  
cancel the test tone.  
• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the  
HOME MENU.  
Note  
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the HOME MENU.  
2 You can’t use the HOME MENU when the iPod/USB or SIRIUS Radio input function is selected. When you set ZONE  
2 to ON (page 69), you can’t use the HOME MENU.  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
10  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
Automatic MCACC (Expert)  
1
Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the Advanced  
MCACC menu, then press ENTER  
.
If the Advanced MCACC screen is not  
displayed, refer to Making receiver settings from  
the Advanced MCACC menu on page 77.  
If your setup requires more detailed settings  
than those provided in Automatically setting up  
for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37,  
you can customize your setup options below.  
You can calibrate your system differently for up  
1.Advanced MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
a. Full Auto MCACC  
b. Auto MCACC  
c. Manual MCACC  
d. Demo  
1
to six different MCACC presets , which are  
useful if you have different listening positions  
depending on the type of source (for example,  
watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
ALL  
Speaker Setting  
Channel Level  
SYMMETRY  
ALL CH ADJ  
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
M2.MEMORY 2  
Speaker Distance  
EQ Pro & S-Wave  
2
game close to the TV).  
FRONT ALIGH: M3.MEMORY 3  
Exit  
THX Speaker  
:
NO  
START  
Important  
Exit  
Return  
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are  
not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.  
2
Select the parameters you want to set.  
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will  
overwrite any existing settings for the  
Use / to select the item, then use / to  
set.  
3
MCACC preset you select.  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
• The screen saver will automatically appear  
after five minutes of inactivity.  
ALL  
Speaker Setting  
Channel Level  
SYMMETRY  
ALL CH ADJ  
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
M2.MEMORY 2  
Speaker Distance  
EQ Pro & S-Wave  
FRONT ALIGH: M3.MEMORY 3  
THX Speaker  
:
NO  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
CAUTION  
ALL  
Speaker Setting  
Channel Level  
Speaker Distance  
EQ Pro & S-Wave  
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC  
Setup are output at high volume.  
SYMMETRY  
ALL CH ADJ  
FRONT ALIGH: M3.MEMORY 3  
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
M2.MEMORY 2  
Exit  
THX Speaker  
:
NO  
START  
®
THX  
Exit  
Return  
THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be  
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights  
reserved.  
Note  
1 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1 to MEMORY6 until you rename them in Data Management  
on page 91.  
2 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re  
using your system.  
3 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the Auto MCACC menu (step 2).  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
4
Auto MCACC – The default is ALL  
(recommended), but you can limit the  
system calibration to only one setting (to  
seating positions in your listening area.  
Place the microphone at the reference  
point indicated on-screen and note the last  
microphone placement will be at your main  
listening position:  
1
save time) if you want. The available  
2
options are ALL, Keep SP System,  
Speaker Setting, Channel Level,  
Speaker Distance and EQ Pro & S-Wave.  
2nd reference  
point  
3rd reference  
point  
EQ Type (only available when the Auto  
MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave)  
– This determines how the frequency  
balance is adjusted.  
1
2
3
After a single calibration is performed, each of  
the following three correction curves can be  
stored separately in the MCACC memory.  
SYMMETRY (default) implements symmetric  
correction for each pair of left and right  
speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude  
characteristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting  
where all the speakers are set individually so  
no special weighting is given to any one  
Main listening  
position  
3
Connect the microphone to the MCACC  
SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.  
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to  
access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack.  
Make sure there are no obstacles between the  
speakers and the microphone.  
3
channel. FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in  
iPod  
iPhone  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
USB  
VIDEO  
L
R
accordance with the front speaker settings (no  
equalization is applied to the front left and right  
channels).  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
iPod  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
iPhone  
USB  
VIDEO  
L
R
THX Speaker (only available when the  
Auto MCACC Menu above is ALL or  
Speaker Setting) – Select YES if you are  
using THX speakers (set all speakers to  
SMALL), otherwise leave it set to NO.  
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available  
when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ  
Pro & S-Wave) – In addition to  
measurements at the listening position,  
you can use two more reference points for  
which test tones will be analyzed for  
If you have a tripod, use it to place the  
microphone so that it’s about ear level at your  
normal listening position. Otherwise, place the  
microphone at ear level using a table or a chair.  
standing waves. This is useful if you want to  
get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration for several  
Note  
1 • The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is also taken when Keep SP System or EQ Pro & S-Wave is selected. See  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 86 for more on this.  
• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the  
respective MCACC preset. For details, see Setting the Audio options on page 64.  
2 The Keep SP System option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 95)  
unchanged.  
3 If you selected ALL as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL  
CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings.  
4 Switch the Multi-Point setting NO if you only use one listening position.  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
4
When you’re finished settings the  
7
If necessary, confirm the speaker  
options, select START then press ENTER  
.
configuration in the GUI screen.1  
The configuration shown on-screen should  
reflect the actual speakers you have.  
5 Follow the instructions on-screen.  
• Make sure the microphone is connected.  
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds  
while the speaker configuration check screen  
is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will  
resume automatically. In this case, you don’t  
need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 8.  
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is  
automatically detected every time you  
switch on the system. Make sure it is on  
and the volume is turned up.  
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC  
Setup on page 39 for notes regarding high  
background noise levels and other possible  
interference.  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
Now Analyzing...  
2/10  
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
:
:
:
OK  
Speaker YES/NO  
6
Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish  
outputting test tones.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while  
the receiver outputs test tones to determine the  
speakers present in your setup. Try to be as  
quiet as possible while it’s doing this.  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
10  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
YES  
YES  
Exit  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
OK  
RETRY  
• Do not adjust the volume during the test  
tones. This may result in incorrect speaker  
settings.  
Exit  
Cancel  
• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker  
configuration displayed isn’t correct), there  
may be a problem with the speaker  
connection.  
If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off  
the power and check the speaker  
connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a  
problem, you can simply use / to select  
the speaker and / to change the  
setting and continue.  
• With error messages (such as Too much  
ambient noise! or Check microphone)  
select RETRY after checking for ambient  
noise (see Problems when using the Auto  
MCACC Setup on page 39) and verifying the  
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be  
a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT  
and continue.  
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the  
speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted.  
2
Check the speaker connections.  
If the connections were wrong, turn off the  
power, disconnect the power cable, then  
reconnect properly. After this, perform the  
Full Auto MCACC procedure again.  
Note  
1 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting from the Auto MCACC menu.  
2 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase  
(dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly  
connected. If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue.  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
8
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press  
You can also choose to view the settings by  
selecting individual parameters from the  
MCACC Data Check screen:  
ENTER  
.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while  
the receiver outputs more test tones to  
determine the optimum receiver settings for  
channel level, speaker distance, and Acoustic  
Calibration EQ.  
Speaker Setting – The size and number of  
speakers you’ve connected (see page 95  
for more on this)  
Channel Level – The overall balance of  
your speaker system (see page 83 or 96 for  
more on this)  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
Now Analyzing...  
Speaker Distance – The distance of your  
Subwoofer Check  
:
speakers from the listening position (see  
1b.Auto MCACC  
2
A/V RECEIVER  
page 83 or 97 for more on this)  
Now Analyzing...  
5/10  
Standing Wave – Filter settings to control  
lower ‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 85 for  
more on this)  
Surround Analysis  
Speaker System  
Channel Level  
Speaker Distance  
Standing Wave  
Reverb  
Exit  
OK  
:
:
:
:
:
:
Aco Cal EQ Pro  
Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the  
frequency balance of your speaker system  
based on the acoustic characteristics of  
your room (see page 85 for more on this)  
Exit  
Cancel  
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this  
is happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.  
Press RETURN after you have finished checking  
• If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-  
Point setup (in step 2), you will be asked to  
place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference  
points before finally placing it at your main  
listening position.  
each screen. When you’re finished, select  
RETURN to go back to the HOME MENU  
.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from  
this receiver upon completion of the Auto  
MCACC Setup.  
9
The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is  
completed and the Advanced MCACC menu  
reappears automatically.  
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup  
should give you excellent surround sound from  
your system, but it is also possible to adjust  
these settings manually using the Manual  
MCACC setup menu (starting below) or  
Manual SP Setup menu (starting on  
1
page 94).  
Note  
1 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5  
inches) will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup  
on page 94.  
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting  
should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.  
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing  
environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.  
2 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are  
cases where (for optimal surround sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10  
Manual MCACC setup  
1
Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the  
Advanced MCACC menu.  
See Making receiver settings from the Advanced  
MCACC menu on page 77 if you’re not already  
at this screen.  
You can use the settings in the Manual  
MCACC setup menu to make detailed  
adjustments when you’re more familiar with  
the system. Before making these settings, you  
should have already completed Automatically  
setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on  
page 37.  
1.Advanced MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
a. Full Auto MCACC  
b. Auto MCACC  
c. Manual MCACC  
d. Demo  
1c.Manual MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
You only need to make these settings once  
(unless you change the placement of your  
1. Fine Channel Level  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
5. EQ Professional  
Exit  
CAUTION  
Exit  
Return  
• The test tones used in the Manual MCACC  
setup are output at high volume.  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might  
want to make these settings in order.  
Important  
Fine Channel Level – Make fine  
speaker system (see Fine Channel Level on  
page 83).  
• You will need to first specify the MCACC  
preset you want to adjust by pressing  
MCACC before pressing HOME MENU  
(step 2 in Making receiver settings from the  
Advanced MCACC menu on page 77).  
Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay  
Speaker Distance on page 83).  
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have  
to connect the setup microphone to the  
front panel and place it about ear level at  
your normal listening position. Press  
HOME MENU to display the HOME MENU  
before you connect the microphone to this  
receiver. If the microphone is connected  
while the HOME MENU is not being  
displayed, the display will change to the  
Full Auto MCACC under Advanced  
MCACC.  
Standing Wave – Control overly resonant  
low frequencies in your listening room (see  
Standing Wave on page 85).  
The last two settings are specifically for  
customizing the parameters explained in  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 85:  
EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency  
balance of your speaker system while  
listening to test tones (see Acoustic  
Calibration EQ Adjust on page 85).  
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC  
Setup on page 39 for notes regarding high  
background noise levels and other possible  
interference.  
EQ Professional – Calibrate your system  
based on the direct sound coming from the  
speakers and make detailed settings  
according to your room’s reverb  
characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration  
EQ Professional on page 86).  
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on  
and turn up the volume to the middle  
position.  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the  
Fine Channel Level  
• Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)  
levels (+/–10.0 dB) as necessary.  
Use / to adjust the volume of the speaker  
you selected to match the reference speaker.  
When it sounds like both tones are the same  
volume, press to confirm and continue to  
the next channel.  
You can achieve better surround sound by  
properly adjusting the overall balance of your  
speaker system. You can adjust the Channel  
Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB increments. The  
following setting can help you make detailed  
adjustments that you may not achieve using  
the Manual speaker setup on page 94.  
1c1.Fine Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
R <=>  
:
L
L
0.0 dB  
R
C
SL  
SR  
SBL  
SBR  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
1
Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the  
Manual MCACC setup menu.  
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference  
level.  
Exit  
Finish  
1c.Manual MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
• For comparison purposes, the reference  
speaker will change depending on which  
speaker you select.  
1. Fine Channel Level  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
5. EQ Professional  
1c1.Fine Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
• If you want to go back and adjust a  
channel, simply use / to select it.  
CAUTION  
Exit  
Loud test tones will be output.  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
Please wait...**  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup  
menu.  
Exit  
Cancel  
Fine Speaker Distance  
• Default setting: 10’00’’ (all speakers)  
2
Adjust the level of the left channel.  
This will be the reference speaker level, so you  
may want to keep the level around 0.0dB so  
that you’ll have plenty of room to adjust the  
other speaker levels.  
For proper sound depth and separation with  
your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit  
of delay to some speakers so that all sounds  
will arrive at the listening position at the same  
time. You can adjust the distance of each  
speaker in half inch increments. The following  
setting can help you make detailed  
1c1.Fine Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1  
Reference Ch  
Ref.Ch Level  
:
:
L
0.0 dB  
adjustments that you may not achieve using  
the Manual speaker setup on page 94.  
Exit  
Cancel  
• After pressing ENTER, test tones will be  
output.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
10  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
1
Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the  
Manual MCACC setup menu.  
1c.Manual MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Fine Channel Level  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
5. EQ Professional  
When it sounds like the delay settings are  
matched up, press to confirm and continue  
to the next channel.  
1c2.Fine SP Distance  
A/V RECEIVER  
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1  
Reference Ch  
Ref.Ch Distance  
:
:
L
Exit  
10’00”  
• For comparison purposes, the reference  
speaker will change depending on which  
speaker you select.  
Exit  
Cancel  
• If you want to go back and adjust a  
channel, simply use / to select it.  
2
Adjust the distance of the left channel  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup  
menu.  
from the listening position.  
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the  
distance as necessary.  
Use / to adjust the delay of the speaker  
you selected to match the reference speaker.  
The delay is measured in terms of speaker  
distance from 0’00-1/2’’ to 45’00’’.  
1c2.Fine SP Distance  
A/V RECEIVER  
R <=>  
:
L
L
10’10”  
R
C
SL  
SR  
SBL  
SBR  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
9’10”  
10’10”  
9’00”  
9’00”  
6’00”  
6’00”  
12’10”  
Exit  
Finish  
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to  
measure the target channel. From the listening  
position, face the two speakers with your arms  
outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to  
make the two tones sound as if they are  
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in  
1
front of you and between your arm span.  
Note  
1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your  
speakers very slightly.  
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other  
speakers). Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the  
low frequency response of the reference speaker).  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
TRIM (only available when the filter channel  
above is SW) – Adjust the subwoofer  
channel level (to compensate for the  
difference in output post-filter).  
Standing Wave  
1
• Default setting: ON /ATT 0.0dB (all filters)  
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under  
certain conditions, sound waves from your  
speaker system resonate mutually with sound  
waves reflected off the walls in your listening  
area. This can have a negative effect on the  
overall sound, especially at certain lower  
frequencies. Depending on speaker placement,  
your listening position, and ultimately the  
shape of your room, it results in an overly  
resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The Standing Wave  
Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly  
resonant sounds in your listening area. During  
playback of a source, you can customize the  
filters used for Standing Wave Control for each  
of your MCACC presets.2  
Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter  
parameters where Freq represents the  
frequency you will be targeting and Q is the  
bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower  
the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation  
(ATT, the amount of reduction to the  
targeted frequency).  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup  
menu.  
• Default setting: ON /0.0dB (all channels/  
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual  
bands)  
MCACC setup menu.  
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of  
room equalizer for your speakers (excluding  
the subwoofer). It works by measuring the  
acoustic characteristics of your room and  
neutralizing the ambient characteristics that  
can color the original source material  
1c.Manual MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Fine Channel Level  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
5. EQ Professional  
1c3.Standing Wave  
A/V RECEIVER  
Filter 1  
Filter 2  
Filter 3  
Filter  
Channel  
Freq ATT Freq  
Q
Q
ATT Freq ATT TRIM  
Q
[Hz] [dB] [Hz]  
[dB] [Hz] [dB] [dB]  
(providing a ‘flat’ equalization setting). If you’re  
not satisfied with the adjustment provided in  
Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(Auto MCACC) on page 37 or Automatic  
MCACC (Expert) on page 78, you can also  
adjust these settings manually to get a  
frequency balance that suits your tastes.  
SW  
63 5.0 10  
5.0  
201 5.0 10 +10.0  
12010  
Exit  
dB  
0
MCACC  
M1.MEMORY1  
5
10  
16  
32  
63  
125  
250  
500  
1k Hz  
Exit  
Finish  
2
Adjust the parameters for the Standing  
Wave Control.  
Filter Channel – Select the channel to  
which you will apply the filter(s): MAIN (all  
except center channel and subwoofer),  
Center or SW (subwoofer).  
Note  
1 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave and Acoustic Calibration EQ feature in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu.  
See Setting the Audio options on page 64 for more on this.  
2 • Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup  
to another MCACC preset.  
• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.  
• When Standing Wave is selected for a MCACC preset memory where STAND.WAVE is set to OFF in the AUDIO  
PARAMETER, STAND.WAVE ON is automatically selected.  
3 When EQ Adjust is selected for a MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER, EQ  
ON is automatically selected.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
1
Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of  
room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate  
from the speakers.  
MCACC setup menu.  
1c.Manual MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Fine Channel Level  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
5. EQ Professional  
How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ  
Professional  
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly  
reverberant in your listening room (i.e. it  
sounds ‘boomy’), or that different channels  
seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics  
(when Type A or Type B shown on the diagrams  
on the following applies), select EQ Pro. & S-  
Wave (or ALL) for the Auto MCACC setting in  
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 78 to  
calibrate the room automatically.  
Exit  
Return  
2
Select the channel(s) you want and adjust  
to your liking.  
1c4.EQ Adjust  
A/V RECEIVER  
dB  
Ch :  
L
0.0 -8.0 -6.0 0.0 +3.0 +8.5 +8.5 +3.0 0.0 0.0  
MCACC  
M1.MEMORY1  
63 125 250 500 1k 8k 16k TRIM  
2k  
4k  
[Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz]  
Type A: Reverberance of high vs. low  
frequencies  
Exit  
Finish  
Low frequencies  
Level  
Use / to select the channel.  
High frequencies  
Use / to select the frequency and / to  
boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go  
ConventionalMCACC  
EQ calibration range  
back to the top of the screen and press  
to  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro  
calibration range  
return to Ch, then use / to select the channel.  
• The OVER! indicator shows in the display if  
the frequency adjustment is too drastic  
and might distort. If this happens, bring the  
level down until OVER! disappears from  
the display.  
0
80  
160  
Time (in msec)  
Type B: Reverb characteristics for  
different channels  
Front L  
Front R  
Level  
Tip  
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel  
too drastically will affect the overall balance.  
If the speaker balance seems uneven, you  
can raise or lower channel levels using test  
tones with the TRIM feature. Use / to  
select TRIM, then use / to raise or lower  
the channel level for the current speaker.  
ConventionalMCACC  
EQ calibration range  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro  
calibration range  
0
80  
160  
Time (in msec)  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
If the pattern is as shown above, select the 30-  
50ms setting. If not, this setting is not  
necessary.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup  
menu.  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Advanced MCACC menu  
10  
3
If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’,  
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
select EQ ON or OFF, and then START  
.
1
Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.  
1c5a.Reverb Measurement  
A/V RECEIVER  
1c.Manual MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
EQ OFF  
Reverb Measure with :  
1. Fine Channel Level  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
5. EQ Professional  
START  
1c5.EQ Professional  
A/V RECEIVER  
a. Reverb Measurement  
b. Reverb View  
c. Advanced EQ Setup  
Exit  
Cancel  
Exit  
The following options determine how the  
reverb characteristics of your listening area are  
displayed in Reverb View:  
Exit  
Return  
EQ OFF – You will see the reverb  
characteristics of your listening area  
receiver (before calibration).  
2
Select an option and press ENTER.  
Reverb Measurement – Use this to  
room.  
EQ ON – You will see the reverb  
characteristics of your listening area with  
the equalization performed by this receiver  
(after calibration). Note that the EQ  
Reverb View – You can check the reverb  
measurements made for specified  
2
1
frequency ranges in each channel.  
response may not appear entirely flat due  
to adjustments necessary for your listening  
area.  
Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select  
the time period that will be used for  
frequency adjustment and calibration,  
based on the reverb measurement of your  
listening area. Note that customizing  
system calibration using this setup will  
alter the settings you made in  
Automatically setting up for surround  
sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37 or  
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 78 and  
is not necessary if you’re satisfied with  
these settings.  
3
When the reverb measurement is finished, you  
can select Reverb View to see the results on-  
screen. See Professional Calibration EQ  
graphical output on page 107 for  
troubleshooting information.  
Note  
1 If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on  
page 37 or Reverb Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may  
appear on the reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves  
controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves  
eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the  
standing waves, so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you  
wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using  
the Reverb Measurement function.  
2 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use  
another MCACC preset, exit the HOME MENU and press MCACC to select it before pressing HOME MENU.  
3 After auto calibration with EQ Type : SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb  
characteristics can be displayed by selecting Reverb View. To display the actually measured reverb characteristics  
after EQ calibration, measure with EQ ON.  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
4
If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can  
time setting. For an optimal system calibration  
based on the direct sound coming from the  
speakers, we recommend using the 30-50ms  
setting.  
check the reverb characteristics for each  
channel. Press RETURN when you’re done.  
1c5b.Reverb View  
A/V RECEIVER  
1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Channel  
Frequency  
Calibration:  
dB  
:
:
Front  
63Hz  
After  
M1.MEMORY 1  
SYMMETRY  
MCACC  
:
:
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
30-50ms  
SYMMETRY  
NO  
16 kHz  
8 kHz  
4 kHz  
2 kHz  
1 kHz  
500 Hz  
250 Hz  
125 Hz  
63 Hz  
Time Position  
EQ Type  
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point  
63.0  
61.0  
59.0  
57.0  
55.0  
53.0  
1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
0
40  
80  
120  
160 ms  
MCACC  
:
:
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
30-50ms  
SYMMETRY  
NO  
Time Position  
EQ Type  
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
The reverb characteristics are displayed when  
the Full Auto MCACC or Reverb  
START  
Measurement measurements are  
conducted.  
Exit  
Cancel  
1
Use / to select the setting. Use / to  
Use / to select the channel, frequency  
and calibration setting you want to check. Use  
/ to go back and forth between the three.  
The reverb characteristics graph before and  
after EQ calibration can be displayed by  
selecting Calibration : Before / After. Note  
that the markers on the vertical axis indicate  
decibels in 2 dB steps.  
switch between them.  
Select the setting from the following time  
periods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms,  
20-40ms, 30-50ms, 40-60ms, 50-70ms and  
60-80ms. This setting will be applied to all  
channels during calibration.  
2
When you’re finished, select START. It will take  
about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.  
5
If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, select  
the MCACC memory to be stored, then enter  
the desired time setting for calibration, and  
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is  
set, you are given the option to check the  
settings on-screen.  
then select START  
.
Based on the reverb measurement above, you  
can choose the time period that will be used for  
the final frequency adjustment and calibration.  
Even though you can make this setting without  
reverb measurement, it is best to use the  
measurement results as a reference for your  
Note  
1 The After display when measurements have been made using the Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC (ALL) function  
shows the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics after EQ Type : SYMMETRY calibration.  
2 The reverb characteristics graph is overwritten each time the reverberations are measured. No Data is displayed if  
there is no reverb characteristic data, for example before measurements have been taken.  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
Checking MCACC Data  
10  
Acoustic Cal EQ Used to check the  
calibration values of the listening  
environment’s frequency response. See  
Acoustic Cal EQ on page 90 for more on  
this.  
At the procedure of Automatically setting up for  
surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37, the  
procedure of Automatic MCACC (Expert) on  
page 78 or after fine-adjusting at Manual  
MCACC setup on page 82, you can check your  
calibrated settings using the GUI screen.  
4
Press RETURN to go back to MCACC Data  
Check menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check  
other settings.  
RECEIVER  
, then press HOME MENU.  
1
Press  
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears  
on your TV. Use /// and ENTER to  
navigate through the screens and select menu  
items. Press RETURN to confirm and exit the  
current menu.  
You will return to the HOME MENU.  
Speaker Setting  
Use this to display the speaker size and  
number of speakers. See Speaker Setting on  
2
Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the  
page 95 for more on this.  
HOME MENU  
.
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the MCACC  
Data Check menu.  
HOME MENU  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Advanced MCACC  
2. MCACC Data Check  
3. Data Management  
4. System Setup  
2a.Speaker Setting  
A/V RECEIVER  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
:
:
:
:
LARGE  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALL x 2  
YES  
2.MCACC Data Check  
A/V RECEIVER  
a. Speaker Setting  
b. Channel Level  
SW  
c. Speaker Distance  
d. Standing Wave  
e. Acoustic Cal EQ  
Exit  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
2
Select the channel you want to check.  
Use / to select the channel. The  
corresponding channel on the layout diagram  
is highlighted.  
3
Select the setting you want to check.  
Speaker Setting – Used to check the  
settings of the speaker systems. See  
Speaker Setting below for more on this.  
Channel Level  
Channel Level – Used to check the output  
level of the different speakers. See Channel  
Level below for more on this.  
Use this to display the level of the various  
channels. See Channel Level on page 96 for  
more on this.  
Speaker Distance – Used to check the  
distance to the different speakers. See  
Speaker Distance on page 90 for more on  
this.  
Standing Wave – Used to check the  
standing wave control filter settings. See  
Standing Wave on page 90 for more on this.  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
10  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the MCACC  
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the MCACC  
Data Check menu.  
Data Check menu.  
2b.Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
2d.Standing Wave  
A/V RECEIVER  
Filter 1 Filter 2  
Filter 3  
ATT TRIM  
[dB] [dB]  
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
Filter  
Channel  
Freq ATT Freq ATT Freq  
Q
Q
Q
[Hz] [dB] [Hz] [dB] [Hz]  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
SW  
63 5.0 10 120 5.0 10 201 5.0 10 +10.0  
dB  
0
MCACC  
M1.MEMORY1  
5
10  
16  
32  
63  
125  
250  
500  
1k Hz  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
2
When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use /  
2
When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, use  
to select the MCACC preset you want to  
check.  
The level of the various channels set at the  
selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is  
displayed for channels that are not connected.  
/ to select the channel for which you  
want to check standing wave control.  
the selected channel stored at the selected  
MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.  
3
Press  
to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use  
Speaker Distance  
/ to select the MCACC preset you want to  
check.  
Use this to display the distance from the  
different channels to the listening position. See  
Speaker Distance on page 97 for more on this.  
Acoustic Cal EQ  
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the  
Use this to display the calibration values for the  
frequency response of the various channels set  
in the different MCACC presets. See Acoustic  
Calibration EQ Adjust on page 85 for more on  
this.  
MCACC Data Check menu.  
2c.Speaker Distance  
A/V RECEIVER  
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
10’10”  
10’10”  
9’10”  
9’00”  
6’00”  
6’00”  
9’00”  
12’10”  
1
Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the MCACC  
Data Check menu.  
2e.Acoustic Cal EQ  
A/V RECEIVER  
Exit  
Return  
dB  
Ch :  
L
0.0 -8.0 -6.0 0.0 +3.0 +8.5 +8.5 +3.0 0.0 0.0  
2
When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use /  
MCACC  
to select the MCACC preset you want to  
check.  
M1.MEMORY1  
63 125 250 500 1k 8k 16k TRIM  
2k  
4k  
[Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz]  
The distance from the various channels set at  
the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is  
displayed for channels that are not connected.  
Exit  
Return  
2
When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use / to  
select the channel.  
The calibration value for the frequency response  
of the selected channel stored at the selected  
MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.  
Standing Wave  
Use this to display the standing wave related  
adjustment values for the various MCACC  
memories. See Standing Wave on page 85 for  
more on this.  
3
Press  
to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use  
/ to select the MCACC preset you want to  
check.  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The Advanced MCACC menu  
Data Management  
10  
MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any  
MCACC presets that you don’t want (see  
Clearing MCACC presets on page 92).  
This system allows you to store up to six  
MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your  
system for different listening positions (or  
frequency adjustments for the same listening  
Renaming MCACC presets  
If you have several different MCACC presets  
that you’re using, you may want to rename  
them for easier identification.  
1
position). This is useful for alternate settings  
to match the kind of source you’re listening to  
and where you’re sitting (for example,  
watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video  
game close to the TV).  
1
Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
3.Data Management  
A/V RECEIVER  
From this menu you can copy from one preset to  
another, name presets for easier identification  
and clear any ones you don’t need.  
a. Memory Rename  
b. MCACC Memory Copy  
c. MCACC Memory Clear  
3a.Memory Rename  
A/V RECEIVER  
MCACC Position Rename  
RECEIVER  
, then press HOME MENU.  
1
Press  
M1  
M2  
M3  
M4  
M5  
M6  
:
:
:
:
:
:
MEMORY 1  
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen  
appears on your TV. Use /// and  
ENTER to navigate through the screens and  
select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm  
and exit the current menu.  
MEMORY 2  
MEMORY 3  
MEMORY 4  
MEMORY 5  
MEMORY 6  
Exit  
Exit  
Finish  
2
Select ‘Data Management’ from the  
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to  
HOME MENU  
.
rename, then select an appropriate preset  
name.  
Use / to select the preset, then / to  
HOME MENU  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Advanced MCACC  
2. MCACC Data Check  
3. Data Management  
4. System Setup  
3
Repeat for as many MCACC presets as  
3.Data Management  
A/V RECEIVER  
necessary, then press RETURN when you’re  
You will return to the Data Management  
setup menu.  
a. Memory Rename  
b. MCACC Memory Copy  
Exit  
Exit  
3
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
Memory Rename – Name your MCACC  
presets for easy identification (see  
Renaming MCACC presets below).  
MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings  
from one MCACC preset to another (see  
Copying MCACC preset data on page 92).  
Note  
1 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37 or Automatic MCACC  
(Expert) on page 78, either of which you should have already completed.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
10  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
Copying MCACC preset data  
Clearing MCACC presets  
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic  
Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on  
page 82), we recommend copying your current  
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC  
presets stored in memory, you can choose to  
clear the calibration settings of that preset.  
1
settings to an unused MCACC preset. Instead  
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the  
of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a  
reference point from which to start.  
Data Management setup menu.  
3.Data Management  
A/V RECEIVER  
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the  
a. Memory Rename  
Data Management setup menu.  
b. MCACC Memory Copy  
c. MCACC Memory Clear  
3c.MCACC Memory Clear  
A/V RECEIVER  
3.Data Management  
A/V RECEIVER  
Clear  
:
M1.MEMORY  
1
a. Memory Rename  
b. MCACC Memory Copy  
c. MCACC Memory Clear  
Exit  
OK  
3b.MCACC Memory Copy  
A/V RECEIVER  
Copy  
From  
To  
:
:
:
All Data  
M1.MEMORY  
M1.MEMORY  
1
1
Exit  
Cancel  
Exit  
OK  
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to  
clear.  
Exit  
Cancel  
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset  
you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).  
2
3
Select the setting you want to copy.  
All Data – Copies all the settings of the  
selected MCACC preset memory.  
3
Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the  
preset.  
Level & Distance – Copies only the channel  
level and speaker distance settings of the  
selected MCACC preset memory.  
When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed,  
select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not  
cleared.  
Select the MCACC preset you’ll be  
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to  
confirm the MCACC preset has been cleared,  
then you automatically return to the Data  
Management setup menu.  
copying the settings ‘From’, then specify  
where you want to copy them (‘To’).  
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC  
preset you’re currently using (this can’t be  
undone).  
4
Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the  
settings.  
When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed,  
select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not  
copied.  
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to  
confirm the MCACC preset has been copied,  
then you automatically return to the Data  
Management setup menu.  
Note  
1 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37 or Automatic MCACC  
(Expert) on page 78.  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The system and the other setup  
11  
Chapter 11:  
The system and the other setup  
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
Making receiver settings from  
the System Setup menu  
4.System Setup  
a.Manual SP Setup  
b. Input Setup  
c. OSD Language  
d. Other Setup  
The following section describes how to change  
the speaker-related settings manually and  
make various other settings (input selection,  
OSD language selection, etc.).  
Exit  
Return  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
1
Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.  
Manual SP Setup Sets the type of  
connection used for surround back  
terminals and the size, number distance  
and overall balance of the connected  
speakers (see Manual speaker setup on  
page 94).  
• If headphones are connected to the  
receiver, disconnect them.  
RECEIVER  
, then press HOME  
2
Press  
MENU.2  
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen  
appears on your TV. Use /// and  
ENTER to navigate through the screens and  
select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm  
and exit the current menu.  
Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve  
connected to the digital, HDMI and  
component video inputs (see The Input  
Setup menu on page 39).  
OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display  
language can be changed (see Changing  
the OSD display language (OSD Language)  
on page 36).  
• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the  
HOME MENU.  
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME  
MENU, then press ENTER  
.
Other Setup – Makes customized settings  
to reflect how you are using the receiver  
(see The Other Setup menu on page 98).  
HOME MENU  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Advanced MCACC  
2. MCACC Data Check  
3. Data Management  
4. System Setup  
Exit  
Return  
Note  
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.  
2 You can’t use the HOME MENU when either the iPod/USB or SIRIUS Radio input function is selected or the  
headphones are connected. When you set ZONE 2 to ON (page 69), you can’t use the HOME MENU.  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
11  
The system and the other setup  
Manual speaker setup  
Channel Level – Adjusts the overall  
balance of your speaker system (page 96).  
This receiver allows you to make detailed  
settings to optimize the surround sound  
performance. You only need to make these  
settings once (unless you change the  
placement of your current speaker system or  
add new speakers).  
Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance  
of your speakers from the listening position  
(page 97).  
X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of  
your speaker system for movie soundtracks  
(page 98).  
These settings are designed to customize your  
made in Automatically setting up for surround  
sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37, it isn’t  
necessary to make all of these settings.  
3
Make the adjustments necessary for each  
setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after  
each screen.  
Surround back speaker setting  
• Default setting: Normal  
CAUTION  
There are several ways you can use the  
surround back speaker channels with this  
system. In addition to a normal home theater  
setup where they are used for the surround  
back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping  
the front speakers or as an independent  
speaker system in another room.  
• The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup  
are output at high volume.  
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press  
ENTER  
.
See Making receiver settings from Making  
receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
on page 93 if you’re not already at this screen.  
1
Select ‘Surr Back System’ from the  
Manual SP Setup menu.  
4.System Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
See Making receiver settings from the System  
Setup menu on page 93 if you’re not already at  
this screen.  
a.Manual SP Setup  
b. Input Setup  
c. OSD Language  
d. Other Setup  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Surr Back System  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Surr Back System  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
Exit  
4a1.Surr Back System  
A/V RECEIVER  
Normal  
Exit  
Return  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
:
:
:
:
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Exit  
SB  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
OK  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may  
want to adjust these settings in order:  
Exit  
Return  
Surr Back System – Specifies how you are  
using your surround back speakers (see  
below).  
Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and  
number of speakers you’ve connected  
(page 95).  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
11  
2
Select the surround back speaker setting.  
Normal – Select for normal home theater  
use with surround back speakers in your  
main (speaker system A) setup.  
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Surr Back System  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
Speaker B – Select to use the (surround  
back) B speaker terminals to listen to  
stereo playback in another room (see  
Switching the speaker system on page 69).  
4a2.Speaker Setting  
A/V RECEIVER  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
SB  
:
:
:
:
:
LARGE  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALL x 2  
YES  
Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re  
bi-amping your front speakers (see Bi-  
amping your speakers on page 20).  
Exit  
SW  
X.OVER  
:
80Hz  
ZONE 2 – Select to use the (surround back)  
B speaker terminals for an independent  
system in another zone (see Using the  
MULTI-ZONE controls on page 69).  
Exit  
Return  
Choose the set of speakers that you want  
to set, then select a speaker size.  
3
When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed,  
Use / to select the size (and number) of  
2
select Yes  
.
each of the following speakers:  
If No is selected, the setting is not changed.  
Front – Select LARGE if your front  
speakers reproduce bass frequencies  
effectively, or if you didn’t connect a  
subwoofer. Select SMALL to send the bass  
frequencies to the subwoofer.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
Speaker Setting  
Use this setting to specify your speaker  
configuration (size, number of speakers and  
Center – Select LARGE if your center  
speaker reproduces bass frequencies  
effectively, or select SMALL to send bass  
frequencies to the other speakers or  
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center  
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is  
sent to the front speakers).  
1
crossover frequency) . It is a good idea to make  
sure that the settings made in Automatically  
setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on  
page 37 are correct. Note that this setting  
applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be  
set independently.  
Surr – Select LARGE if your surround  
speakers reproduce bass frequencies  
effectively. Select SMALL to send bass  
frequencies to the other speakers or  
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround  
speakers choose NO (the sound of the  
surround channels is sent to the front  
speakers or a subwoofer).  
Note  
1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.  
2 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center, surround  
and surround back speakers can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass  
frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11  
The system and the other setup  
SB – Select the number of surround back  
speakers you have (one, two or none).  
Channel Level  
1
Using the channel level settings, you can  
adjust the overall balance of your speaker  
system, an important factor when setting up a  
home theater system.  
Select LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your  
surround back speakers reproduce bass  
frequencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 or  
SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the  
other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t  
connect surround back speakers choose  
NO.  
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual  
SP Setup menu.  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of  
channels set to SMALL are output from the  
subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose  
the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer  
to output bass sound continuously or you  
want deeper bass (the bass frequencies  
that would normally come out the front and  
center speakers are also routed to the  
1. Surr Back System  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
4a3.Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
Test Tone  
:
AUTO  
Exit  
2
subwoofer). If you did not connect a  
Exit  
Return  
subwoofer choose NO (the bass  
frequencies are output from other  
speakers).  
2
Select a setup option.  
MANUAL – Move the test tone manually  
individual channel levels.  
3
Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover  
frequency.3  
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the  
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).  
AUTO – Adjust channel levels as the test  
tone moves from speaker to speaker  
automatically.  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
Note  
1 • If you selected Speaker B, ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp (in Surround back speaker setting on page 94) you can’t adjust  
the surround back settings.  
• If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.  
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back  
terminal.  
2 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS  
for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your  
room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try  
changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with it set to  
PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best.  
If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for  
the front speakers.  
3 • This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the  
subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for  
bass sounds in the LFE channel.  
• If you’re using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The system and the other setup  
11  
3
Confirm your selected setup option.  
Speaker Distance  
The test tones will start after you press ENTER.  
For good sound depth and separation from  
your system, you need to specify the distance  
of your speakers from the listening position.  
The receiver can then add the proper delay  
needed for effective surround sound.  
4a3.Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
CAUTION  
Loud test tones will be output.  
Please wait...**  
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the  
Manual SP Setup menu.  
Exit  
Cancel  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4
Adjust the level of each channel using /  
1. Surr Back System  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
.
If you selected MANUAL, use / to switch  
speakers. The AUTO setup will output test  
tones in the order shown on-screen:  
4a4.Speaker Distance  
A/V RECEIVER  
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
10’10”  
9’50-1/2”  
10’10”  
9’00”  
10’00”  
10’00”  
9’00”  
12’10-1/2”  
Exit  
4a3.Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.00 dB  
0.00 dB  
0.00 dB  
0.00 dB  
0.00 dB  
0.00 dB  
0.00 dB  
0.00 dB  
Exit  
Finish  
2
Adjust the distance of each speaker using  
Exit  
Finish  
/  
.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in  
1/2 inch increments.  
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone  
is emitted.  
1
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
Tip  
Tip  
• For best surround sound, make sure the  
surround back speakers are the same  
distance from the listening position.  
• You can change the channel levels at any  
time by press RECEIVER , then press CH  
LEVEL, and then using / on the  
remote control.  
Note  
1 • If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust  
the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).  
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual  
soundtrack.  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
11  
The system and the other setup  
X-Curve  
The Other Setup menu  
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too  
bright when played back in large rooms. The X-  
Curve setting acts as a kind of re-equalization  
for home theater listening, and restores proper  
tonal balance of movie soundtracks.  
The Other Setup menu is where you can make  
customized settings to reflect how you are  
using the receiver.  
1
Press RECEIVER on the remote control,  
then press HOME MENU  
1
Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP  
.
Setup menu.  
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen  
appears on your TV. Use /// and  
ENTER to navigate through the screens and  
select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm  
and exit the current menu.  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Surr Back System  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
2
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME  
MENU  
.
Exit  
Return  
3
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.  
2
Choose the X-Curve setting you want.  
4.SystemSetup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Use / to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is  
expressed as a downwards slope in decibels  
per octave, starting at 2 kHz. The sound  
becomes less bright as the slope increases (to  
a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the following  
guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your  
room size:  
a.Manual SP Setup  
b. Input Setup  
c. OSD Language  
d. Other Setup  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
Exit  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
2
400  
550  
650  
800  
2200  
12000  
Room size (ft )  
X-Curve  
(dB/oct)  
Exit  
Return  
–0.5 –1.0 –1.5 –2.0 –2.5  
–3.0  
• If you select OFF, the frequency curve will  
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
be flat and the X-Curve has no effect.  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may  
want to adjust these settings in order:  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
KURO LINK Setup – Synchronizes this  
receiver with your Pioneer component  
supporting KURO LINK (see KURO LINK  
Setup on page 62).  
Multi Ch In Setup Specifies the optional  
settings for a multi-channel input (page 99)  
.
ZONE Audio Setup – Specifies the volume  
setting for a MULTI-ZONE setup (page 99).  
Power ON Level Setup – Specifies the  
volume level set when the power is turned  
on (page 100).  
Volume Limit Setup – Limits the  
maximum volume (page 100).  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The system and the other setup  
11  
Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this  
receiver’s remote control mode (page 101).  
3
Select the ‘Video Input’ setting you want.  
When the multi-channel input is selected as an  
input function, you can display the video  
images of other input functions. The video  
input can be selected from the following: DVD,  
TV/SAT, DVR, VIDEO, OFF.  
Flicker Reduction – Adjusts the way the  
GUI screen looks (page 101).  
5
Make the adjustments necessary for each  
setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after  
each screen.  
4d2.Multi Ch In Setup  
SW Input Gain  
Video Input  
:
:
+10dB  
DVD  
Multi Channel Input Setup  
You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a  
multi-channel input. Also, when the multi-  
channel input is selected as an input function,  
you can display the video images of other input  
functions. In the Multi Channel Input Setup,  
you can assign a video input to the multi-  
channel input.  
Exit  
Finish  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
ZONE Audio Setup  
1
Select ‘Multi Ch In Setup’ from the Other  
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see  
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 69),  
you may need to specify your volume setting.  
Setup menu.  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
1
Select ‘ZONE Audio Setup’ from the  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
Other Setup menu.  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
Exit  
Return  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6.  
Remote Control Mode Setup 4d3.ZONE Audio Setup  
2
Select the ‘SW Input Gain’ setting you  
want.  
0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at  
7. Flicker Red
A/V RECEIVER  
ZONE 2 Volume Level : Variable  
Exit  
the level originally recorded on the source.  
+10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer  
at the level increased by 10 dB.  
Exit  
Finish  
4d2.Multi Ch In Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1
SW Input Gain  
Video Input  
:
:
0dB  
DVD  
2
Select the volume level setting of ZONE 2.  
Variable – Use this setting if you’ve  
connected a power amplifier in the sub  
room (this receiver is simply being used as  
a pre-amp) and you will be using this  
receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.  
Exit  
Finish  
Note  
1 If you selected ZONE 2 in the Surround back speaker setting on page 94, you won’t be able to change the volume level.  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
11  
The system and the other setup  
Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected  
a fully integrated amplifier (such as  
another Pioneer VSX receiver) in the sub  
room and want to use that receiver’s  
volume controls.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
Volume Limit Setup  
Use this function to limit the maximum  
volume. The volume cannot be increased  
above the level set here, even by operating  
MASTER VOLUME button (or the dial on the  
front panel).  
With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from  
this receiver at maximum volume, so make  
sure the volume is quite low in the sub zone at  
first, and then experiment to find the correct  
level.  
1
Select ‘Volume Limit Setup’ from the  
Other Setup menu.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
Power ON Level Setup  
The volume can be set so that it is always set to  
the same level when the receiver’s power is  
turned on.  
4d5.Volume Limit Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
OFF  
Volume Limit  
:
Exit  
1
Select ‘Power ON Level Setup’ from the  
Other Setup menu.  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
Exit  
Finish  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
2
3
Select the Volume Limit setting you want.  
OFF – The maximum volume is not limited.  
4d4.Power ON Level Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Power ON Level  
: LAST  
-20.0dB/-10.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum  
volume is limited to the value set here.  
Exit  
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
Exit  
Finish  
2
Select the Power ON Level setting you  
want.  
LAST – When the power is turned on, the  
volume is set to the same level as when the  
power was last turned off.  
• “---” – When the power is turned on, the  
volume is set to minimum level.  
-80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to  
be set when the power is turned, in steps of  
0.5 dB.  
It is not possible to set a volume level greater  
than the value specified at Volume Limit Setup.  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The system and the other setup  
11  
Remote Control Mode Setup  
• Default setting: 1  
Flicker Reduction Setup  
• Default setting: 4  
This sets this receiver’s remote control mode to  
prevent erroneous operation when multiple  
units of the receiver are being used.  
The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased.  
If you feel the GUI screen is hard to see, try  
changing this setting. Note that the resolution  
in this setting only affects the GUI screen; it  
has no influence on the video output.  
1
1
Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’  
from the Other Setup menu.  
1
Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from the  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Other Setup menu.  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
4d6.Remote Control Mode Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Remote Control Mode  
:
1
Exit  
4d7.Flicker Reduction Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Flicker Reduction  
:
4
Exit  
OK  
Exit  
Cancel  
2
Select the Remote Control Mode setting  
Exit  
Finish  
you want.  
2
Select the Flicker Reduction setting you  
3
Select “OK” to change the remote control  
want.  
mode.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
4
Follow the instructions on the screen to  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
change the remote control’s setting.  
See Operating multiple receivers on page 73.  
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
Note  
1 If you change this receiver’s setting, also change the setting on the remote control.  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
12  
Additional information  
Chapter 12:  
Additional information  
Troubleshooting  
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is  
something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in  
another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the  
trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer  
authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.  
Note  
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity  
disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating  
conditions.  
Power  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The power does not turn on. • Make sure that the power cable is plugged in to an active power outlet.  
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.  
Power cannot be turned off. • Set the remote control’s MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch to ZONE 2,  
then press RECEIVER to switch the Zone 2 off.  
(ZONE 2 ON is displayed.)  
The receiver suddenly  
switches off or the PHASE  
• Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel  
or another set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are  
CONTROL indicator blinks. no stray strands.  
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call  
a Pioneer authorized independent service company.  
• Turn down the volume.  
• Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on  
During loud playback the  
power suddenly switches off.  
page 82.  
• Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the front  
panel, press STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use  
TUNE +/– to select D.SAFETY OFF, and then use PRESET +/– to select 1 or  
2 (select D.SAFETY OFFto deactivate this feature). If the power switches  
off even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some  
features may be unavailable.  
The unit does not respond  
when the buttons are  
pressed.  
• Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.  
• Try disconnecting the power cable, then connect again.  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
AMP ERR blinks in the  
display, then the power  
automatically switches off.  
The ADVANCED MCACC  
blinks and the power does  
not turn on.  
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver  
on. Contact a Pioneer authorized independent service company for help.  
Power indicator flashes and • There is a problem with the receiver’s power unit or fan. Try turning on the  
power turns off.  
power after 1 minute. If the same thing happens, the receiver is damaged.  
Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent  
service company. (Other symptoms may appear when the power is turned on.)  
AMP OVERHEAT and the  
• Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back  
power indicator flash and the on.  
power turns off.  
• Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.  
The Receiver suddenly power • The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a  
off or the blue indicator at the Pioneer authorized independent service company.  
center of the receiver flashes.  
No sound  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound is output when an • Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press  
input function is selected.  
SPEAKERS).  
No sound output from the  
front speakers.  
• Make sure the correct input function is selected.  
• Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.  
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL). Note that  
when PCM is selected, you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.  
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting  
your equipment on page 14).  
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers  
on page 18).  
No sound from the surround • Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance  
or center speakers.  
mode isn’t selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see Listening  
in surround sound on page 53).  
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker  
Setting on page 95).  
• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 96).  
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).  
No sound from surround  
back speakers.  
• Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see  
Speaker Setting on page 95).  
• Make sure surround back channel processing is set to SBch ON (see Using  
surround back channel processing on page 56).  
• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS-ES with no flag to indicate 6.1  
compatibility, then with surround back channel processing set to SBch Auto,  
there will be no sound from the surround back speakers. In this case, set to  
SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 56).  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Additional information  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound from surround  
back speakers.  
(Continued)  
• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround  
back channel processing is set to SBch ON and a surround mode is selected  
(see Listening in surround sound on page 53).  
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).  
the left channel speaker terminal.  
No sound from subwoofer.  
• Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume  
turned up.  
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.  
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on  
page 95).  
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the  
characteristics of your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 95).  
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change  
your speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE /  
Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 95).  
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or a very quiet setting (see  
Setting the Audio options on page 64).  
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 96).  
No sound from one speaker. • Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).  
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 96).  
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on  
page 95).  
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced  
effect listening mode, you may be able to create the missing channel (see  
Listening in surround sound on page 53).  
Sound is produced from  
• Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input  
analog components, but not signal on page 58).  
from digital ones (DVD, LD,  
CD-ROM, etc.).  
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the  
component is connected to (see The Input Setup menu on page 39).  
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.  
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not  
turned down.  
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any  
other input function.  
No sound is output or a noise • Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.  
is output when Dolby Digital/  
DTS software is played back.  
• Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS  
signal output is set to On.  
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not  
turned down.  
No sound when using the  
HOME MENU or STATUS  
menu.  
• If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting either  
menu.  
• If sound is muted in the sub zone (ZONE 2), it will be restored after exiting the  
HOME MENU.  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Other audio problems  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Broadcast stations cannot be For FM broadcasts  
selected automatically, or  
there is considerable noise in  
radio broadcasts.  
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and  
secure to a wall, etc.  
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 30).  
For AM broadcasts  
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.  
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 30).  
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a  
fluorescent light, motor, etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move  
the AM antenna.  
A multichannel DVD source • Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the  
appears to be downmixed to multichannel analog inputs on page 42).  
2 channels during playback.  
Noise is output when  
scanning a DTS CD.  
• This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player  
alters the digital information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being  
output. Lower the volume when scanning.  
When playing a DTS format • Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input  
LD there is audible noise on signal on page 58).  
the soundtrack.  
Can’t record audio.  
• You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog  
recording from an analog source.  
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.  
• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks  
(see Connecting other audio components on page 29).  
Subwoofer output is very low. • To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers  
to SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 95).  
Everything seems to be set up • The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker  
correctly, but the playback  
sound is odd.  
terminals on the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the  
speakers (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).  
The PHASE CONTROL  
• If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or  
feature doesn’t seem to have the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE  
an audible effect.  
setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on the subwoofer, the  
setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).  
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker  
Distance on page 97).  
Noise or hum can be heard • Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the  
even when there is no sound same power source are not causing interference.  
being input.  
There seems to be a time lag • See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37 to  
between the speakers and  
set up your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for  
the output of the subwoofer. a delay in the subwoofer output).  
The maximum volume  
• Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Limit Setup on  
available (shown in the front page 100).  
panel display) is lower than  
the +12dB maximum.  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Additional information  
Video  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No image is output when an • Check the video connections of the source component (see page 28).  
input is selected.  
• For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV and another  
component are connected with different cords (in Setting the Video options on  
page 67), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video  
cable as you used to connect your video component.  
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using  
component video or HDMI cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 39).  
• Check the video output settings of the source component.  
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.  
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not  
be converted. If adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video  
options on page 67) and/or the resolution settings on your component or  
display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video  
options on page 67) OFF.  
Can’t record video.  
• Check that the source is not copy-protected.  
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the  
same type of video cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video  
source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.  
Noisy, intermittent, or  
distorted picture.  
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning,  
for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units,  
for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your  
display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and  
display device using the same type of connection (component or composite),  
then start playback again.  
Settings  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The Auto MCACC Setup  
• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as  
continually shows an error. low as possible (see also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on  
page 39). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you will have to set up  
the surround sound manually (page 94).  
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND  
BACK L (Single) terminals.  
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround  
channel, not the surround back channel.  
• Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.  
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following:  
– The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker  
connections.  
– Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions, Reverse  
Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected. If this  
happens, select GO NEXT and continue.  
– If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when  
using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.),  
it may not be possible to properly identify the polarity.  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Symptom  
Remedy  
After using the Auto MCACC • There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-  
Setup, the speaker size  
setting is incorrect.  
conditioner, motor, etc. Switch off all other appliances in the room and use  
Auto MCACC Setup again.  
• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this  
may occur in some cases. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker  
Setting on page 95, and use the ALL (Keep SP System) option for the Auto  
MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 78 if this is a recurring  
problem.  
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker • Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and  
Distance setting (page 83)  
properly.  
negative () terminals are matched up properly).  
The display shows KEY LOCK • With the receiver in standby, press STANDBY/ON while holding down  
ON when you try to make  
SPEAKERS to disable the key lock.  
settings.  
Most recent settings have  
been erased.  
• The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output  
Symptom  
The EQ response displayed in • There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting  
the graphical output ALL CH ADJ in the Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to  
following calibration doesnot compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.  
Remedy  
appear entirely flat.  
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little  
or no adjustment needed.  
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and  
after measurements.  
EQ adjustments made using • Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not  
the Manual MCACC setup on display these adjustments in the graphical output. However, these adjustments  
page 82 do not appear to  
are taken this into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration.  
change the graphical output.  
Lower frequency response  
• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not  
curves do not seem to have change for speakers that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration,  
been calibrated for SMALL  
or do not output these frequencies.  
speakers.  
• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations,  
no measurable sound is output for display.  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12  
Additional information  
Display  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The display is dark or off.  
• Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.  
After making an adjustment • Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.  
the display goes off.  
You can’t get DIGITAL to  
• Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are  
display when using SIGNAL assigned correctly (see The Input Setup menu on page 39).  
SEL.  
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input  
function.  
2 DIGITAL or DTS does not • These indicators does not light if playback is paused.  
light when playing Dolby/DTS  
software.  
• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source  
component.  
When playing Dolby Digital • Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.  
orDTSsources, thereceiver’s  
format indicators do not light.  
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the  
input signal on page 58).  
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are  
converted to PCM.  
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or  
DTS is selected.  
When playing certain discs, • The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging  
none of the receiver’s format for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc.  
indicators light.  
When playing a disc with the • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the  
listening mode set to Auto  
Surround or ALC, 2 PL II or  
Neo:6 appear on the receiver.  
input signal on page 58).  
• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround  
encoded), then this is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details  
about the audio tracks available.  
During playback of a  
• The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to  
indicate it is 6.1 compatible. Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel  
processing on page 56), then switch to the Standard EX listening mode (see  
Listening in surround sound on page 53).  
Surround EX or DTS-ES  
source on the SBch AUTO  
setting, EX or ES does not  
appear, or the signal is not  
properly processed.  
During playback of DVD-  
Audio, the display shows  
PCM.  
• This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection.  
This is not a malfunction.  
The power turns off  
• See the Power section (page 102).  
automatically and some  
indicator flashes, or some  
indicator flashes and the  
power does not turn on.  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Remote control  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Cannot be remote controlled. • Set a 5-digit preset code corresponding to the receiver to be operated in the  
remote control (see Operating multiple receivers on page 73).  
• Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set (see  
Remote Control Mode Setup on page 101).  
• Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on  
page 7).  
• Be sure to operate within 7 m (23 feet) and a 30º angle of the remote sensor  
on the front panel (see Operating range of remote control unit on page 13).  
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote  
control.  
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the  
remote sensor.  
• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer  
components with this unit’s sensor on page 32).  
Other components can’t be • If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the  
operated with the system  
remote.  
preset codes.  
• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset  
codes.  
HDMI  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The HDMI indicator blinks  
continuously.  
• Check all the points below.  
No picture or sound.  
• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are  
connecting are also HDCP-compatible. If they are not, please connect them  
using the component or composite video jacks.  
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not  
work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect  
using the component or composite video jacks between source and receiver.  
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly  
to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact  
the manufacturer for support.  
• If video images do not appear on your TV or flat panel TV, try adjusting the  
resolution, DeepColor or other setting for your component.  
• If ‘NOT SUPPORT’ appears in the receiver’s display, try adjusting the  
resolution, DeepColor or other setting for your component.  
• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate  
connection for audio output.  
• When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI  
setting set to THROUGH, you cannot hear audio output from all channels. In  
this case, make a digital or analog audio connection.  
• To output signals in DeepColor, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI™  
Cable) to connect this receiver to a component or TV with the DeepColor  
feature.  
No picture.  
• Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 67).  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Additional information  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound, or sound suddenly • Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.  
ceases.  
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.  
• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection  
for the audio.  
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.  
Noisy or distorted picture.  
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning,  
for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units,  
for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your  
display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and  
display device using the same type of connection (component or composite),  
then start playback again.  
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly  
to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact  
the manufacturer for support.  
HDCP ERROR shows in the • Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If  
display.  
it is not compatible with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different  
type of connection (component or composite). Some components that are  
compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as  
there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.  
Amp-linked operation not  
possible using KURO LINK  
function.  
• Check the HDMI connections.  
• The cable may be damaged.  
• Select ON for the KURO LINK setting (see KURO LINK Setup on page 62).  
• Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.  
• Set the TV side KURO LINK setting to ON.  
Important information regarding the HDMI connection  
There are cases where you may not be able to  
route HDMI signals through this receiver (this  
depends on the HDMI-equipped component  
you are connecting–check with the  
manufacturer for HDMI compatibility  
information).  
Configuration A  
Use component video cables to connect the  
video output of your HDMI-equipped  
component to the receiver’s component video  
input. The receiver can then convert the analog  
component video signal to a digital HDMI  
signal for transmission to the display. For this  
configuration, use the most convenient  
connection (digital is recommended) for  
sending audio to the receiver. See the  
operating instructions for more on audio  
connections.  
If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly  
through this receiver (from your component),  
please try one of the following configurations  
when connecting up.  
Note  
• The picture quality will change slightly  
during conversion.  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
• Depending on the component, audio  
output may be limited to the number of  
channels available from the connected  
display unit (for example audio output is  
reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with  
stereo audio limitations).  
Configuration B  
Connect your HDMI-equipped component  
directly to the display using an HDMI cable.  
Then use the most convenient connection  
(digital is recommended) for sending audio to  
the receiver. See the operating instructions for  
more on audio connections. Set the display  
volume to minimum when using this  
configuration.  
• If you want to switch the input function,  
you’ll have to switch functions on both the  
receiver and your display unit.  
• Since the sound is muted on the display  
when using the HDMI connection, you  
must adjust the volume on the display  
every time you switch input functions.  
Note  
• If your display only has one HDMI terminal,  
you can only receive HDMI video from the  
connected component.  
USB interface  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
The folders/files stored on The folders/files are currently stored Store the folders/files in the FAT region.  
a USB memory device are in a region other than the FAT (File  
not displayed.  
Allocation Table) region.  
The number of levels in a folder is  
more than 8.  
Limit the maximum number of levels in a  
folder to 8 (page 45).  
There are more than 30 000 folders/ Limit the maximum number of folders/files  
files stored in a USB memory device. stored in a USB memory device to 30 000  
(page 45).  
The audio files are copyrighted.  
Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB  
memory device cannot be played back  
(page 45).  
A USB memory device is The USB memory device does not  
Try using a USB memory device compatible  
with the mass storage class specifications.  
Note that there are cases where even the  
audio files stored on a USB memory device  
compatible with the mass storage class  
specifications are not played back on this  
receiver (page 45).  
not recognized.  
support the mass storage class  
specifications.  
Connect the USB memory device and  
switch on this receiver (page 35).  
A USB hub is currently being used. This receiver does not support a USB hub  
(page 45).  
This receiver recognizes the USB  
memory device as a fraud.  
Switch off and on again this receiver.  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Additional information  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
A USB memory device is Some formats of a USB memory  
Check whether the format of your USB  
connected and displayed, device, including FAT 12, NTFS, and memory device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32.  
but the audio files stored HFS, cannot be played back on this Note that the FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS  
on the USB memory  
device cannot be played  
back.  
receiver.  
formats cannot be played back on this  
receiver (page 45).  
The file format cannot be properly  
played back on this receiver.  
See the list of file formats that can be played  
back on this receiver (page 48).  
SIRIUS radio messages  
Message  
Cause  
Action  
Antenna ERROR  
Antenna is not properly connected. Check that the antenna cable is attached  
securely.  
Check Sirius Tuner  
Acquiring Signal  
SIRIUS Connect tuner is not  
properly connected.  
Check that the 8 pin mini DIN cable and AC  
Adapter are attached securely.  
The SIRIUS signal is too weak at the n/a  
current location.  
Subscription Updating  
Updating Channels  
Invalid Channel  
Unit is updating subscription.  
Wait until the encryption code has been  
updated.  
Unit is updating channels.  
Wait until the encryption code has been  
updated.  
Selected channel is not available/  
does not exist.  
Select another channel.  
Firmware Updating  
The SIRIUS Connect tuner’s  
firmware is being updated.  
Wait for updating to finish.  
If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting above, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or  
if the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:  
• Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.  
• If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over  
10 seconds. The power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may  
be cleared.)  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Surround sound formats  
12  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9  
Pro) is a discrete surround format developed by  
Microsoft Corporation.  
Below is a brief description of the main  
surround sound formats you’ll find on DVDs,  
satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and  
video cassettes.  
Dolby  
The Dolby technologies are explained below.  
See www.dolby.com for more detailed  
information.  
Windows Media and the Windows logo are  
trademarks or registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/  
or other countries.  
About iPod  
Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol  
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
DTS  
The DTS technologies are explained below. See  
www.dtstech.com for more detailed  
information.  
“Made for iPod” means that an electronic  
accessory has been designed to connect  
specifically to iPod and has been certified by  
the developer to meet Apple performance  
standards.  
“Works with iPhone” means that an electronic  
accessory has been designed to connect  
specifically to iPhone and has been certified by  
the developer to meet Apple performance  
standards.  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent  
#’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;  
6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929;  
7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide  
patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered  
trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD  
and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of  
DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights  
Reserved.  
Apple is not responsible for the operation of  
this device or its compliance with safety and  
regulatory standards.  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in  
the U.S. and other countries. iPhone is a  
trademark of Apple Inc.  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Additional information  
About SIRIUS  
SIRIUS and the SIRIUS-Ready logo are  
registered trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite  
Radio Inc.  
About Neural – THX Surround  
®
For additional information, please visit  
www.neuralsurround.com.  
Neural-THX Surround is taking surround sound to the  
next level. This revolutionary new technology delivers the  
rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround  
sound in a format that is fully compatible with stereo from  
various content sources. Neural-THX Surround enables 5.1,  
6.1 and 7.1-channel support for gaming, movies and digital  
music. By unmasking the audio details, typically lost by  
other playback modes, audiences will experience the deep  
ambience and subtle details of movies, music and games.  
This product is manufactured under license from Neural  
Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. PIONEER Corporation  
hereby grants the user a non-exclusive, non-transferable,  
limited right of use to this product under USA and foreign  
patent, patent pending and other technology or trademarks  
owned by Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural  
Surround”, “Neural Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are  
trademarks and logos owned by Neural Audio Corporation,  
THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in  
some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
®
Neural-THX Digital Music™ is a new surround mode  
specifically designed to enhance the playback of  
compressed digital music content. It provides listeners  
with an expanded sound stage and clean surround  
experience, even with compressed audio sources such as  
MP3s and Internet streams.  
Neural-THX Surround has been chosen as the official  
surround sound format for TV sports broadcasting, 7.1  
games, Music Direct Internet streaming as well as leading  
FM/HD radio stations worldwide. And with this technology  
being used by sound designers during content creation, as  
well as embedded into playback devices, Neural-THX  
Surround promises a listening experience that is true to the  
original mix.  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional information  
12  
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats  
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the  
Stream Direct mode (see Using Stream Direct on page 56) you have selected.  
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats  
Auto Surround / ALC /  
Input signal format  
PURE DIRECT  
DIRECT  
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected  
Dolby Digital Surround  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
As above  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)  
Stereo playback  
As above  
DTS Surround  
Other stereo sources  
Analog sources  
PCM sources  
As above  
DVD-A sources  
As above  
SACD sources  
As above  
As above  
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected  
Dolby Digital Surround  
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
As above  
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)  
Stereo playback  
As above  
DTS Surround  
Other stereo sources  
Analog sources  
PCM sources  
As above  
DVD-A sources  
SACD sources  
As above  
As above  
As above  
Multichannel signal formats  
Input signal format  
Auto Surround / ALC  
Dolby Digital EX  
PURE DIRECT / DIRECT  
Dolby Digital EX  
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected  
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)  
a
a
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
Straight decoding  
As above  
DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding)  
DTS-HD sources  
DTS+Neo:6  
Straight decoding  
As above  
Other 6.1/7.1 channel sources  
Other 5.1 channel sources  
As above  
Dolby Digital EX  
As above  
a
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected  
DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM  
Straight decoding  
As above  
Straight decoding  
As above  
SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding)  
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources  
As above  
As above  
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Additional information  
Preset code list  
You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but  
please note that there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the  
model that you are using. There are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable  
after assigning the proper preset code.  
TV  
Celebrity 10000  
Emerson 10047, 10017,  
10154, 10451, 10236,  
10463, 10180, 10150,  
10178, 10171, 10623,  
11394  
Hyundai 10865  
General  
Celera 10765  
Ima 10236, 10180, 10178  
Infinity 10054  
Innova 10037  
Insignia 11423, 11564,  
10171, 11517, 11710,  
12049  
Inteq 10017, 10145  
JBL 10054  
JCB 10000  
Jinxing 10037, 10556  
JVC 10054, 10053, 10160,  
10650, 10731, 11253,  
11601, 11633, 11774  
Kamp 10017, 10180  
KDS 11498, 11687  
KEC 10180, 10060  
Kenwood 10180  
Kioto 10556  
Pioneer 10166, 10679,  
Changhong 10156, 10765  
Cineral 10451, 10092  
Citek 10047  
11260, 11398  
A-Mark 10047, 10054,  
10160  
A.R. Systems 10556  
Accuscan 10047  
Admiral 10047, 10054,  
10017, 10051, 10093,  
10463, 10180  
Envision 11365  
Citizen 10000, 10054,  
10451, 10463, 10180,  
10060, 10171, 10092  
Clarion 10180  
ESA 10812, 10171  
Ferguson 10625  
Fisher 10000, 10054, 10154  
Fortress 10093  
Classic 10092  
Colortyme 10047, 10054,  
10017, 10060, 10178  
Commercial Solutions  
11447, 10047  
Fujitsu 10809, 10683, 10853  
Funai 10000, 10180, 10171,  
11271  
Adventuri 10000  
Agna 10150  
Aiko 10092  
Futuretech 10180  
Akai 10812, 11675, 10060,  
10702, 10145, 10672  
Alba 10037  
Conic 10178  
Contec 10180  
Craig 10180, 10171  
Crosley 10000, 10054,  
10180, 10171  
Gateway 11755, 11756  
GE 10000, 11447, 10047,  
10051, 10451, 10060,  
10178, 11147  
Gemini 10047  
GFM 10171  
Gibralter 10000, 10017  
GoldStar 10047, 10054,  
10178, 10037  
Goodmans 10037  
Gradiente 10053  
Granada 10037  
Grundig 10037, 10672,  
10683  
Grundy 10180  
Grunpy 10180  
Haier 11748  
Hallmark 10236, 10180,  
10178  
Hannspree 11351  
Hanseatic 10556  
Harley Davidson 10000,  
10180, 10060, 10178  
Harman/Kardon 10054  
Harvard 10180  
Alfide 10672  
Ambassador 10150  
America Action 10180  
American High 10000,  
10060  
Crown 10093, 10180, 10672  
Crown Mustang 10672  
Curtis Mathes 10000,  
10047, 10054, 10154,  
10051, 10451, 10093,  
10180, 10060, 10702,  
10178, 10145, 10166,  
10037, 11147  
KLH 10156, 10180, 10765  
Konka 10180  
KTV 10463, 10180  
Amstrad 10171  
Amtron 10000, 10180  
Anam 10180  
AOC 10180, 11365  
Apex Digital 10156, 10765,  
10890, 11217  
AR 10556  
Audinac 10180  
Audiovox 10451, 10180,  
10092, 10623, 10802,  
10875  
Aventura 10171  
Barco 10556  
Lark 10154  
LG 11423, 10054, 10017,  
11265, 10060, 10178,  
10037, 10856, 11178,  
11663, 11768  
CXC 10180  
Daewoo 11755, 10451,  
10178, 10092, 11661,  
10623, 10661, 10672,  
11756  
Lloyd's 10236, 10180  
Loewe 10633  
Logik 10236, 10180  
Lumatron 10037, 10556  
LXI 10000, 10047, 10054,  
10017, 10154, 10156,  
10051, 10093, 10060,  
10053, 10178, 10171,  
10166, 10037  
Dayton 10092  
Daytron 10178, 10092  
Dell 11264, 11080, 11178,  
11403  
Baysonic 10180  
Beaumark 10017, 10178  
Bell & Howell 10054,  
10154, 10093  
Denon 10145  
Dumont 10017, 10180,  
10178  
MAG 11498, 11687  
Magnasonic 10000, 10054,  
10156, 10093, 10092  
Magnavox 10000, 10250,  
11454, 11866, 11755,  
10047, 10054, 10154,  
10051, 10180, 10060,  
10171, 10092, 10802,  
11254, 11365, 10037  
Majestic 10017  
Durabrand 10463, 10180,  
10178, 10171  
BenQ 11574  
Havermy 10093  
Heathkit 10017  
Helios 10865  
Hello Kitty 10451  
Hewlett Packard 11494,  
11101, 11502  
Blue Sky 10556  
Bradford 10180  
Brockwood 10178  
Broksonic 10236, 10463,  
10180  
Dwin 10093  
Dynex 11463, 12049  
Eaton 10060  
Electroband 10000  
Electrograph 11755  
Electrohome10000, 10154,  
10463, 10150, 10178  
Element 11687  
Byd:sign 11309  
Hitachi 10000, 11643,  
10047, 10054, 10017,  
10051, 11145, 10145,  
11576  
Capehart 10017, 10178,  
10092  
Carver 10054  
CCE 10037  
Marantz 11454, 10054,  
10037, 10556, 10704,  
10855, 11398  
Emerald 10178  
HP 11494, 11101, 11502  
Mark 10037  
116  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional information  
12  
Matsui 10037  
Pilot 10051, 10060, 10178  
Sky-North 10037  
Solar Drape 10000  
Sony 10810, 10000, 10017,  
10154, 10150, 10053,  
11651, 11685  
Soundesign 10180, 10178  
Spectravision 10156,  
10178  
Spectroniq 11498, 11687  
Squareview 10171  
SR2000 10154, 10171  
SSS 10180  
Vidikron 10054, 11398,  
11633  
Matsushita 10250, 10051,  
10650  
Polaroid 11523, 10765,  
10865, 11276, 11314,  
11498, 11687, 11766  
Portland 10451, 10092  
Precision 10236, 10180  
Prism 10250, 10051  
Proscan 11447, 10047  
Protec 10037  
Vidtech 10178  
Maxent 11755, 11211,  
11756, 11757  
Megatron 10047, 10178,  
10145  
Viewsonic 11755, 10857,  
10864, 10885  
Viking 10060  
Viore 10054  
Vizio 11758, 11755, 10864,  
10885, 11756  
Wards 10000, 10047,  
10054, 10017, 10154,  
10051, 10093, 10236,  
10178, 10166, 10037,  
11156  
Waycon 10156  
Welton 10178  
Westinghouse 10000,  
11712, 10451, 10885,  
10889, 10890, 11282,  
11577  
White Westinghouse  
10451, 10236, 10463,  
10623, 10889  
Memorex 10154, 10463,  
10180, 10150, 10178,  
10037  
Proton 10178  
Mermaid 10037  
Proview 11498, 11687  
ProVision 10037, 10556  
Pulsar 10017, 10092  
Pulser 10178, 10092  
MGA 10150, 10178  
MGN Technology 10178  
Micro Genius 10150  
Midland 10047, 10017,  
10051  
Starlite 10236, 10180  
Superscan 10093, 10864  
Supreme 10000  
Quartz 10150, 10178  
Quasar 10250, 10051,  
10650  
R-Line 10037  
Rabbit 10047  
RadioShack 10047, 10154,  
10180, 10150, 10178  
RCA 10000, 11547, 11447,  
10047, 10054, 10051,  
10093, 10178, 10090,  
10679, 11047, 11147,  
11247, 11781, 12187  
Realistic 10047, 10154,  
10180, 10150, 10178  
Revox 10037  
Runco 10017, 10060, 11398  
Sampo 11755, 10047,  
11756  
Samsung 10812, 10047,  
10054, 10017, 10154,  
10060, 10702, 10178,  
12051, 11619, 11235,  
11060, 10814, 10766,  
10650, 10587, 10037  
Sanky 10060  
Sansui 10463, 10060, 10171  
Sanyo10000,11755,10047,  
10054, 10154, 10463,  
10171, 10037, 11142  
Saville 10060  
Sceptre 11217, 11360  
Scotch 10178  
Scott 10236, 10180, 10178  
Sears 10000, 10047, 10054,  
10017, 10154, 10156,  
10051, 10093, 10060,  
10053, 10178, 10171,  
10166, 10037  
SV2000 10054  
Minato 10037, 10556  
Mitsubishi 10154, 11250,  
10093, 10150, 10178,  
10160, 10836  
Motorola 10054, 10051,  
10093, 10150  
MTC 10180, 10060, 10092  
Multitech 10180  
NAD 10156, 10178, 10166,  
10037, 11156  
National 10226  
NEC 10047, 10178, 10704,  
11398, 11704, 11797  
NetTV 11755  
Nikko 10178, 10092  
Nikkodo 10178, 10092  
Norcent 11365  
NTC 10092  
Nyon 10000  
Olevia 11610, 11144,  
11240, 11331  
Onwa 10180  
Optimus 10250, 10154,  
10093, 10180, 10150,  
10178, 10166, 10650  
Optonica 10093  
Orion 10017, 10236, 10463,  
10180, 10178, 11463  
SVA 10587, 10865  
Sylvania 10000, 11864,  
10047, 10054, 10154,  
10051, 10178, 10171,  
10092, 10037, 11271,  
11314, 11394  
Symphonic 10000, 10180,  
10178, 10171  
Syntax 11610, 11144,  
11240, 11331  
World10451, 10236, 10463,  
10180  
Wyse 11365  
XR-1000 10154, 10180,  
10171  
Tandy 10093  
Tatung 10000, 10051,  
10037, 11101, 11756  
Teac 10154, 10037  
Technics 10250, 10054,  
10051, 10226  
Yamaha 10650  
Zenith 10000, 10812,  
11423, 10047, 10017,  
10093, 10463, 11265,  
10178, 11145, 10145,  
10171, 10092, 10037,  
10160  
Techwood 10250, 10051,  
10060  
Teknika 10054, 10463,  
10180, 10150, 10060,  
10178, 10092  
Telecolor 10017  
Telefunken 10702, 10625  
Tevion 10037, 10556  
Thomas 10047, 10178  
Thomson 11447, 10047,  
10625  
TMK 10236, 10180, 10178  
TNCi 10017  
Tocom 10156  
Pace 10092  
Pacific 10037, 10556  
Panasonic 11480, 10250,  
10054, 10156, 10051,  
10236, 10226, 10650,  
11310, 11636, 11650  
Paxonic 10060  
Toshiba 11524, 10154,  
10156, 11256, 10150,  
11265, 10060, 11145,  
10145, 10166, 10650,  
10845, 11156, 11656,  
11704  
Totevision 10051  
Toyomenka 10178  
Truetone 10250, 10051  
TVS 10463  
Ultra 10092  
Universal 10047  
Universum 10037  
V 11755, 10864, 10885,  
11756  
Victor 10053, 10160  
PCE 10156, 10060  
Seleco 11351  
Sharp 10818, 10054, 10093,  
10180, 11393  
Penney 10000, 10250,  
10047, 10156, 10051,  
10060, 10178, 10037  
Petters 11523  
Sheng Chia 10093  
Shivaki 10178, 10037,  
10556  
Philco 10054, 10463, 10145,  
10171, 11271, 11394  
Philips 11454, 10054,  
10171, 10037, 10556,  
10605, 10690, 11254,  
11506, 11744  
Siemens 10145  
Signature 10047, 10093  
Simpson 10178  
Singer 10060, 10092  
117  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Additional information  
Sceptre 11217, 11360  
Sharp 10818, 10093  
Sony 10810, 11685  
Superscan 10864  
SVA 10587  
Sylvania 11864, 10171,  
11271, 11314, 11394  
Symphonic 10171  
Syntax 11610, 11144,  
11240, 11331  
Toshiba 11524, 10845,  
11656  
Vidikron 11398  
Viewsonic 10857, 10864,  
10885  
Vizio 11758, 10864, 10885,  
11756  
Plasma Television  
Pioneer 10679, 11260,  
11398, 11633, 14000,  
14001, 14003, 14004  
Akai 10812, 11675  
Daewoo 10661  
Dell 11264  
Electrograph 11755  
ESA 10812  
Fujitsu 10809, 10683, 10853  
Funai 11271  
Gateway 11755, 11756  
Haier 11748  
Helios 10865  
Hewlett Packard 11502  
Hitachi 11643  
HP 11502  
Insignia 11564  
JVC 10731  
LG 11423, 10178, 10856  
LCD  
HDTV  
Pioneer 11260  
Pioneer 10679  
Mitsubishi 10150  
Olevia 11610  
Akai 11675  
AOC 11365  
Apex Digital 10890, 11217  
Audiovox 10180, 10802,  
10875  
Byd:sign 11309  
Dell 11264, 11080, 11178  
Dynex 12049  
Element 11687  
Emerson 11394  
Envision 11365  
Funai 10171  
Haier 11748  
Hannspree 11351  
Hitachi 11643  
Insignia 11564, 11517,  
11710, 12049  
JVC 11601, 11774  
LG 11423, 10856, 11178,  
11768  
Magnavox 11866, 10802,  
11365  
Marantz 10855  
Maxent 11755, 11211,  
11757  
Mitsubishi 11250  
NEC 11797  
Norcent 11365  
Panasonic 10250, 10650  
RCA 11447  
Samsung 10812, 10702  
Toshiba 11256  
Rear Projection TV  
Akai 10812, 10702  
Apex Digital 10765  
Hitachi 11145  
JVC 11601  
Mitsubishi 11250  
Panasonic 10250  
RCA 11447  
Samsung 10812  
Sony 10810  
Toshiba 10156, 11656  
Westinghouse 11712,  
10885, 10889, 10890,  
11282, 11577  
Wyse 11365  
Zenith 11265  
Magnavox 11866  
Marantz 10704, 11398  
Maxent 11755, 11757  
Mitsubishi 10836  
TV/DVD Combination  
Akai 11675  
Dynex 12049  
Emerson 11394  
Insignia 12049  
Magnavox 11866  
Polaroid 11523, 11766  
RCA 12187  
NEC 11398, 11704  
NetTV 11755  
Panasonic 11480, 10250,  
10650  
Philips 10690, 11744  
Polaroid 10865, 11276  
Olevia 11610, 11144,  
11240, 11331  
Panasonic 11480, 10650  
Petters 11523  
Philips 11454, 11744  
Polaroid 11523, 11276,  
11498, 11687, 11766  
Runco 11398  
Sampo 11755  
Sylvania 11864, 11394  
Toshiba 11524  
Samsung 10812, 12051  
Sanyo 11142  
Sony 10810, 10000  
SVA 10865  
TV/VCR Combination  
America Action 10180  
Sylvania 11271, 11394  
RCA 10047, 11781, 12187  
Audiovox 10180  
Tatung 11101, 11756  
Toshiba 10650, 11704  
Viewsonic 11755  
Vizio 11758, 11756  
Sampo 11755  
Emerson 10236  
Samsung 10812, 10766,  
10814, 12051  
Sanyo 11142  
Zenith 10178  
118  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
DVR/VCR  
12  
Dynatech 20000  
Loewe 20081  
Logik 20000  
Lumatron 20278  
LXI 20037, 20000, 20042,  
20067  
Magnasonic 20037, 20000,  
20278  
Philips 20739, 20035,  
20162, 20081, 20045,  
20000, 20616, 20618  
Pilot 20037  
Polk Audio 20081  
Portland 20278  
Presidian 21593  
Proscan 20060  
Protec 20000  
Pulsar 20039, 20278  
General  
Electrohome 20060,  
20037, 20000, 20043  
Electrophonic 20037  
Emerex 20032  
Emerson 20037, 20000,  
20043, 20278, 20348,  
21479, 21593  
Fisher 20039, 20000  
Fuji 20035, 20033  
Fujitsu 20000  
Funai 20037, 20000, 20278,  
21593  
Pioneer 20162, 20081,  
20042, 20067, 20058,  
22306, 22465, 22466,  
22467  
A-Mark 20037, 20000,  
20278  
ABS 21972  
Accurian 20000  
Admiral 20060, 20039  
Adventura 20037, 20000  
Aiko 20278  
Aiwa 20037, 20000  
Alba 20278  
Alienware 21972  
Allegro 20039  
America Action 20278  
American High 20035,  
20081  
Amstrad 20000  
Anam National 20226  
Astra 20035  
Magnavox 20035, 20037,  
20039, 20081, 20000,  
20226, 20618, 21593  
Marantz 20035, 20081,  
20038  
Quartz 20035  
Quasar 20035, 20162,  
20226, 21162  
Marta 20037  
Matsui 20037, 20348  
Matsushita 20035, 20162,  
20081, 21162  
RadioShack 20035, 20162,  
20037, 20000, 21162  
Radix 20037  
Garrard 20000  
Gateway 21972  
GE 20060, 20035, 20000,  
20807  
Media Center PC 21972  
Medion 20348  
MEI 20035  
Memorex 20035, 20162,  
20037, 20039, 20000,  
20278, 20348, 21162  
Metz 20037  
Randex 20037  
RCA 20060, 20035, 20045,  
20000, 20042, 20058,  
20807, 20880  
Gemini 20060  
Genexxa 20037, 20000,  
20278  
Realistic 20035, 20162,  
20037, 20000, 20278,  
21162  
ReplayTV 20614, 20616  
Ricavision 21972  
Runco 20039  
Samsung 20739, 20060,  
20045, 20000, 20038,  
21014  
GFM 21593  
Go Video 20614  
GoldStar 20035, 20037,  
20039, 20000, 20278,  
20038  
Audio-Technica 20058  
Audiovox 20037, 20278,  
20038  
MGA 20060, 20043  
Microsoft 21972  
Mind 21972  
Avis 20000  
Goodmans 20037, 20081,  
20000, 20278  
Gradiente 20000  
Granada 20081, 20042  
Grundig 20081, 20226  
Harley Davidson 20000  
Harman/Kardon 20081,  
20038  
Hewlett Packard 21972  
HI-Q 20035, 20000  
Hitachi 20035, 20037,  
20045, 20000, 20042  
Howard Computers 21972  
HP 21972  
Hughes Network  
Systems 20739, 20042  
Humax 20739  
Hush 21972  
Hytek 20000  
iBUYPOWER 21972  
Instant Replay 20035,  
20226  
Jensen 20067  
JVC 20067, 20058, 21162  
Minolta 20042  
Bell & Howell 20035,  
20039, 20000  
Broksonic 20348, 21479  
Mitsubishi 20060, 20000,  
20042, 20067, 20043,  
20807  
Sanky 20039  
Sansui 20000, 20067, 21479  
Sanyo 20000  
Motorola 20035  
MTC 20000  
Calix 20037  
Candle 20037, 20038  
Canon 20035  
MTX 20000  
Scott 20045, 20043  
Sears 20060, 20035, 20162,  
20037, 20039, 20033,  
20045, 20000, 20042,  
20067, 20043, 20058  
Sharp 20032, 20000, 20807  
Shintom 20039, 20000  
Siemens 20037  
Multitech 20039, 20000  
Carver 20035, 20081  
CCE 20278  
NAD 20058  
Cineral 20278  
NEC 20067, 20038  
Nikko 20037, 20278  
Nikkodo 20037, 20278  
Niveus Media 21972  
Northgate 21972  
Citizen 20035, 20037,  
20000, 20278  
Classic 20037  
Colortyme 20060, 20035,  
20045, 20278  
Signature 20060, 20035,  
20037, 20000  
Singer 20037  
Olympus 20035, 20162,  
20226  
Onkyo 20222  
Optimus 21062, 20035,  
20162, 20037, 20000,  
20058, 21162  
Orion 20000, 20278, 21479  
Panama 20035  
Panasonic 21062, 20035,  
20162, 20000, 20225,  
20226, 20614, 20616,  
21162, 21244, 21293,  
21562  
Colt 20000  
Craig 20037  
Criterion 20000  
Crosley 20035, 20081,  
20000  
Sonic Blue 20614, 20616  
Sony 20032, 20035, 20033,  
20000, 20067, 20226,  
20636, 21972  
Crown 20278  
Curtis Mathes 20060,  
20035, 20162, 20000,  
20278  
Soundmaster 20000  
Stack 9 21972  
STS 20042  
CyberPower 21972  
SV2000 20000  
KEC 20037, 20278  
Kenwood 20067, 20038  
Kodak 20035, 20037  
KTV 20000  
Daewoo 20037, 20045,  
20278  
SVA 20000  
Sylvania 20035, 20081,  
20000, 20043, 21593  
Symphonic 20000, 21593  
Systemax 21972  
Daytron 20037, 20278  
Dell 21972  
Penney 20035, 20162,  
20037, 20081, 20000,  
20042, 20067, 20038  
Pentax 20042  
LG 20037, 20038  
Lifetec 20348  
Denon 20081, 20042  
DirecTV 20739  
Tagar Systems 21972  
Tandy 20000  
Tashiko 20037  
Linksys 21972  
Dual 20000  
Philco 20035, 20081, 20000  
Lloyd's 20000, 20038  
Durabrand 20039, 20038  
119  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Additional information  
Tatung 20081, 20000,  
20067  
Teac 20000, 20067  
Technics 20035, 20162,  
20037, 20000  
Teknika 20035, 20037,  
20000  
Thomas 20000  
Thomson 20060  
Tisonic 20278  
Tivo 20739, 20618, 20636,  
21996  
TMK 20000  
TNIX 20037  
Toshiba 20045, 20000,  
20043, 21972, 21996  
Tosonic 20278  
Totevision 20037  
Touch 21972  
Trix 20037  
Ultra 20045, 20278  
Vector Research 20038  
Microsoft 21972  
PVR  
Victor 20067  
Mind 21972  
Pioneer 22306, 22465,  
Video Concepts 20045  
Videomagic 20037  
Videosonic 20000  
Viewsonic 21972  
Villain 20000  
Niveus Media 21972  
Northgate 21972  
Panasonic 20614, 20616  
Philips 20739, 20618  
RCA 20880  
ReplayTV 20614, 20616  
Samsung 20739  
22466, 22467  
ABS 21972  
Alienware 21972  
CyberPower 21972  
Dell 21972  
DirecTV 20739  
Gateway 21972  
Go Video 20614  
Hewlett Packard 21972  
Howard Computers 21972  
HP 21972  
Hughes Network  
Systems 20739  
Humax 20739  
Hush 21972  
iBUYPOWER 21972  
Linksys 21972  
Media Center PC 21972  
Voodoo 21972  
Wards 20060, 20035,  
20037, 20081, 20033,  
20045, 20000, 20042,  
20043, 20038, 20058  
White Westinghouse  
20000, 20278  
XR-1000 20035, 20000  
Yamaha 20038  
Sonic Blue 20614, 20616  
Sony 20636, 21972  
Stack 9 21972  
Systemax 21972  
Tagar Systems 21972  
Tivo 20739, 20618, 20636  
Toshiba 21972, 21996  
Touch 21972  
Viewsonic 21972  
Voodoo 21972  
Zenith 20037, 20039,  
20033, 20000, 20278,  
21479  
ZT Group 21972  
Vector 20045  
ZT Group 21972  
DVD  
Bush 30690  
DVD2000 30521  
Electrohome 32116  
Elta 30690  
Emerson 30591, 30675,  
30821, 31268  
iLo 31348, 31472  
Initial 31472  
General  
California Audio Labs  
30490  
Cambridge Soundworks  
30690  
Cat 30789  
Celestial 31020  
Centrex 30672, 31004  
Cinea 30831  
CineVision 30869, 31483  
Citizen 30695, 31277,  
31587, 32116  
Clairtone 30571  
Clatronic 30788  
Coby 30778, 30852, 31086,  
31107, 31321, 31351  
Craig 30831  
Creative 30503, 30539  
CyberHome 30714, 30816,  
30874, 31023, 31024,  
31129, 31502, 31537  
Pioneer 30525, 30571,  
30142, 30631, 30632,  
31460, 31512, 31571,  
32442  
Insignia 30675, 31268,  
32095, 32428  
Integra 30571, 31769,  
30627, 31634, 32147  
IRT 30783  
Enterprise 30591  
Entivo 30503, 30539  
Enzer 30770  
3D LAB 30503, 30539  
A-Trend 30714  
Jaton 30665  
Accurian 30675, 31416  
Acoustic Solutions 30730  
Adcom 31094  
JBL 30702  
ESA 30821, 31268  
JMB 30695  
Firstline 30651  
JSI 31423  
Fisher 30670  
AEG 30788  
JVC 30558, 30623, 30867,  
31164, 31275, 31550  
jWin 31051  
Funai 30675, 31268, 31334  
Aiwa 30533, 30641  
Akai 30695, 30770, 30899  
Alba 30672  
Gateway 31158  
GE 30522, 30815  
GFM 30675, 31268  
Go Video 30573, 30744,  
30741, 30783, 30869,  
31044, 31075, 31158,  
31304, 31483  
GoldStar 30741, 30869  
Goodmans 30790  
Gradiente 30490, 30651  
Grundig 30539, 30775  
Kawasaki 30790  
Alco 30790  
Allegro 30869  
Kenwood 30490, 30534  
Kiss 30665, 30841  
KLH 30790, 31020, 31149  
Kloss 30533  
Amphion Media Works  
30872  
Amstrad 30713  
AMW 30872  
Koss 30651, 31061, 31423  
Kreisen 31421  
Landel 30826  
Lasonic 30627, 30789  
Lecson 31533  
LG 30591, 30741, 30869  
Limit 30768  
LiteOn 31058, 31158,  
31416, 31656  
Loewe 30511, 30741  
Logix 30783  
Apex Digital 30533, 30672,  
30794, 30796, 30797,  
30830, 31004, 31020,  
31056, 31061  
Daewoo 30784, 30714,  
30770, 30869, 31172  
Dansai 30770  
H & B 30850  
Daytek 30872  
Decca 30770  
Arrgo 31023  
Audiovox 30790  
Awa 30730  
Harman/Kardon 30582,  
30702  
Denon 30490, 30634,  
31634, 32258  
Hello Kitty 30831  
HiMAX 30843  
BBK 31224  
Denver 30778  
Bel Canto Design 31571  
Black Diamond 30713  
Blue Parade 30571  
Blue Sky 30695, 30713  
Brandt 30651  
Hitachi 30573, 30664,  
31247, 31664, 31748  
Hiteker 30672  
Diamond 30768  
Digitor 31005  
Magnasonic 30651, 30675  
Digitrex 30672  
Hoyo 30665  
Humax 31500, 31588  
Hyundai 30850  
Disney 30675, 31270  
Dual 30675  
Broksonic 30695, 30868  
Durabrand 30713, 31023  
120  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Magnavox 30503, 30539,  
30646, 30675, 30713,  
30821, 31140, 31268,  
31354, 31472, 31506  
Marantz 30503, 30539,  
30675  
Redstar 30763  
Reoc 30752  
Magnavox 30646, 30675,  
Vizio 31064, 31226  
Xbox 30522, 32083  
Yamaha 30490, 30539,  
30646, 30545, 30497,  
30817  
Yamakawa 30665, 30710,  
30872  
Zenith 30503, 30591,  
30741, 30869  
Zeus 30784  
31506  
Rio 30869  
Panasonic 30490, 31010,  
31011, 31579  
Philips 30646, 31340  
Polaroid 31086  
RCA 30522  
Samsung 30490  
Sanyo 30670  
Sensory Science 31158  
Sharp 30675  
Sony 31033, 31069, 31070,  
31431, 31536  
Sylvania 30675  
Toshiba 31510, 31588,  
32277  
Zenith 30741  
Rotel 30623, 31178  
Rowa 31004  
Saba 30651  
Sampo 30752  
Samsung 30490, 30573,  
30744, 30199, 30820,  
30899, 31044, 31075,  
31748, 32329  
Sansui 30695  
Sanyo30670,30675,30695,  
31334  
Schmartz 32367  
Schneider 30783  
Schwaiger 30752  
Sensory Science 31158  
Sharp 30630, 30675, 30752,  
31256, 32250  
McIntosh 31533, 31273  
Medion 30651  
Memorex 30695, 30831,  
31270  
MiCO 30723, 30751  
Microsoft 30522, 32083  
Minato 30752  
Mintek 31472  
Mitsubishi 31521, 30521  
Monyka 30665  
Mustek 30730  
Myryad 30894  
NAD 30741  
Naiko 30770  
Nakamichi 31222  
NEC 30785, 30869  
Next Base 30826  
Nintaus 31051  
Norcent 30872, 31107  
Onkyo 30503, 31769,  
30627, 30612, 31612,  
31627, 32147  
Blu-ray  
Pioneer 30142, 32442  
Denon 32258  
Insignia 30675, 32428  
Integra 32147  
LG 30741  
Magnavox 30675  
Onkyo 32147  
Panasonic 31641  
Philips 32084  
DVD/PVR  
Sherwood 30770  
Shinsonic 30533  
Singer 30751  
Combination  
Pioneer 30631, 31512  
Humax 31500, 31588  
LG 30741  
Panasonic 30490, 31010,  
31011  
Philips 31340  
RCA 30522  
Sharp 31256  
Sony 31033, 31069, 31070,  
31536  
Sylvania 30675  
Skyworth 30898, 32148  
Slim Art 30784  
Sharp 32250  
Sony 31516  
Sylvania 30675  
SM Electronic 30690,  
30730  
Sonic Blue 30573, 30783,  
30869  
HD-DVD  
Integra 31769  
LG 30741  
Microsoft 32083  
Onkyo 31769  
RCA 31769  
Toshiba 31769, 31515  
Xbox 32083  
Oppo 30575, 31224, 31525  
Optimus 30571  
Oritron 30651  
Sony 31533, 30533, 30864,  
31033, 31069, 31070,  
31431, 31516, 31536  
Superscan 30821  
Sylvania 30675, 30821,  
31268, 32194  
Pacific 30768  
Palsonic 30672, 30852  
Panasonic 30490, 30503,  
30571, 30632, 30703,  
31010, 31011, 31362,  
31462, 31490, 31579,  
31641, 31762  
Symphonic 30675, 30821,  
31268, 31334  
TAG McLaren 30894  
Tatung 30770  
Teac 30571, 30759, 30790  
Technics 30490, 30703  
Technika 30770  
Technosonic 30730  
Tevion 30651  
Theta Digital 30571  
Thomson 30522, 30511,  
30551  
Tivo 31503, 31512, 31588  
Tokai 30665  
Toshiba 30503, 30573,  
30539, 31769, 30695,  
31045, 31154, 31503,  
31510, 31515, 31588,  
31608, 32277  
Tivo 31512  
Toshiba 31503, 31510,  
31588  
Philco 30675, 30690, 30733  
Philips 30503, 30539,  
32056, 32084, 30646,  
30585, 30675, 30713,  
30854, 31158, 31260,  
31267, 31340, 31354,  
31506  
DVD-R  
Pioneer 30631, 31460,  
31512  
Accurian 30675, 31416  
Apex Digital 31056  
Citizen 32116  
PianoDisc 31024  
Polaroid 31020, 31061,  
31086  
Coby 31086  
CyberHome 31129, 31502  
Polk Audio 30539  
Portland 30770  
Electrohome 32116  
Funai 30675, 31334  
Gateway 31158  
Go Video 30741, 31158,  
31304  
Humax 31588  
iLo 31348  
JVC 31164, 31275  
Kreisen 31421  
LG 30741  
LiteOn 31158, 31416  
Presidian 30675  
Proceed 30672  
Proscan 30522  
ProVision 30778  
Tredex 30843  
Unimax 30770  
United 30730, 30788  
Universum 30591, 30779  
Urban Concepts 30503,  
30539  
Qwestar 30651  
Radionette 30741  
RadioShack 30571  
Raite 30665  
RCA 30522, 30571, 31769,  
30790, 30822, 31022  
Realistic 30571  
V 31064, 31226  
Venturer 30790  
121  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Additional information  
Emerson 30675  
Funai 30675  
GFM 30675  
Go Video 30744, 30741,  
30869, 31044, 31075,  
31483  
GoldStar 30741  
Hitachi 30664  
LiteOn 31656  
Magnavox 30675  
Memorex 30695  
Panasonic 31762  
Philips 30675, 31267  
Polaroid 31061  
Presidian 30675  
RCA 30522, 30822  
Sansui 30695  
DVD/VCR  
Combination  
Pioneer 31460  
Accurian 30675  
Allegro 30869  
Apex Digital 31061  
Broksonic 30695  
CineVision 30869, 31483  
Daewoo 30869  
Sanyo 30670  
Sharp 30630  
Sony 30864, 31033, 31069,  
31070, 31431  
Sylvania 30675  
Symphonic 30675  
Toshiba 30503  
Zenith 30741, 30869  
JVC 30867, 31164, 31550  
LG 30741  
Samsung 30820, 31044,  
31075  
CD  
Magnavox 70157  
Marantz 70626, 70029,  
70157, 70180  
RadioShack 70000, 70032,  
70180, 70468  
RCA 70032, 70053, 70468  
Realistic 70000, 70032,  
70087, 70180, 70468  
Revox 70157  
Rotel 70157  
SAE 70157  
General  
CD-R  
Pioneer 71063, 70032,  
Pioneer 71087  
Kenwood 70626  
Marantz 70626  
Onkyo 71322, 71323  
Philips 70626  
71087, 70468, 73468  
Matsui 70157  
Aiwa 70157  
MCS 70029  
Memorex 70000, 70032,  
70468  
Micromega 70157  
Miro 70000  
Mission 70157  
Modulaire 70000, 70032,  
70087, 70180, 70468  
Myryad 70157  
Arcam 70157  
Audio Research 70157  
Cairn 70157  
California Audio Labs  
70029  
Cambridge Soundworks  
70157  
Carver 70157  
Curtis Mathes 70032  
Denon 70034, 70766  
DKK 70000  
DMX Electronics 70157  
Fisher 70000  
Genexxa 70032  
Grundig 70157  
RCA 70053  
Sony 70000, 70100, 71364  
Yamaha 71292  
Sansui 70000, 70157  
Sanyo 70000, 70087  
Sharp 70037, 70180  
Sherwood 70180  
Sonic Frontiers 70157  
Sony 70000, 70100, 71364  
Sugden 70157  
MD  
Pioneer 71063  
Onkyo 70868  
Optimus 71063  
NSM 70157  
Onkyo 70868, 71327,  
70101, 70102, 70138,  
70381, 71322, 71323  
Optimus 71063, 70000,  
70032, 70037, 70087,  
70468  
Panasonic 70029, 70388,  
70752  
Penney 70029  
Philips 70626, 70157  
Polk Audio 70157  
Proton 70157  
QED 70157  
Quad 70157  
Quasar 70029  
Sylvania 70157  
Symphonic 70180  
TAG McLaren 70157  
Tandy 70032  
Teac 70180  
Technics 70029  
Thule Audio 70157  
Harman/Kardon 70100,  
70157  
Hitachi 70032  
Inkel 70157, 70180  
Integra 70101  
Victor 70072  
Wards 70032, 70157,  
70053, 70087  
Yamaha 70868, 70036,  
71292  
Yorx 70000  
JVC 70032, 70072  
Kenwood 70626, 70000,  
70029, 70028, 70037  
Krell 70157  
Linn 70157  
122  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Satellite Set Top Box  
12  
Funai 01377  
GE 00566  
GOI 00775, 01775  
Gradiente 00887  
Grundig 00173, 00847  
Hitachi 00749, 00819  
Houston 00775  
Pansat 01807  
General  
SAT/PVR  
Combination  
Bell ExpressVu 00775  
DirecTV 01377, 00392,  
00639, 01142, 01076,  
00099, 01392, 01442,  
01640  
Dish Network System  
00775, 01505  
Dishpro 00775, 01505  
Echostar 00775, 01505  
Expressvu 00775  
Hughes Network  
Systems 01142, 01442  
Philips 01142, 01442  
Proscan 00392  
RCA 01392  
Philips 00775, 01142,  
00749, 01749, 01076,  
00722, 00099, 00200,  
00847, 01442  
Pioneer 00329, 01308  
Akai 00200  
Allsat 00200  
Amstrad 00847, 01113  
Asat 00200  
Proscan 00392, 00566  
RadioShack 00775, 00566  
RCA 00775, 00392, 00566,  
01142, 00143, 01291,  
01392, 01442  
Sagem 00820, 01114  
Samsung 01377, 01142,  
01276, 01108, 01109,  
01442, 01609  
Siemens 00173  
SKY 00099, 00847, 00887,  
01175  
Sony 00639, 01639, 00847,  
01640  
Star 00887  
Televisa 00887  
Thomson 00392, 00566  
Tivo 01142, 01442  
Toshiba 00749, 01749,  
00790  
TPS 00820  
UltimateTV 01392, 01640  
Uniden 00722  
Austar 00642, 00879, 01176  
HTS 00775, 01775  
Hughes Network  
Systems 01142, 00749,  
01749, 01442  
Bell ExpressVu 00775  
British Sky Broadcasting  
00847  
Canal 00853  
Chaparral 00216  
Crossdigital 01109  
DirecTV 01377, 00392,  
00566, 00639, 01639,  
01142, 00247, 00749,  
01749, 00819, 01856,  
01076, 01108, 00099,  
01109, 01392, 01414,  
01442, 01609, 01640  
Dish Network System  
00775, 01505, 01775  
Dishpro 00775, 01505,  
01775  
Humax 01781, 01790  
Indovision 00887  
Innova 00099  
ISkyB 00887  
JVC 00775, 00492, 01775  
LG 01414  
Magnavox 00722  
Marantz 00200  
Mitsubishi 00749  
Netsat 00099, 00887  
Nokia 00723  
Samsung 01442  
Sony 00639, 01640  
Tivo 01142, 01442  
Zenith 01810  
Omega 00887  
Echostar 00775, 01505,  
01775  
Pace 00847, 00887, 01175  
Panasat 00879  
Panasonic 00247, 00701,  
00847  
Esat 00879  
Expressvu 00775, 01775  
ViewSat 01232  
Zenith 01856, 01810  
Fortec Star 01821  
Foxtel 00879  
Cable Set Top Box  
General Instrument  
Panasonic 00000, 00008,  
00144, 00107, 01982  
Paragon 00000, 00008,  
00525  
United Cable 00276  
US Electronics 00276,  
00008  
Videoway 00000  
Zenith 00000, 00525  
General  
Pioneer 01877, 00877,  
00144, 00533, 01021,  
01782  
A-Mark 00008, 00144  
ABC 00237, 00008  
Acorn 00237  
Action 00237  
Active 00237  
Amino 01602, 01822  
Archer 00237  
BCC 00276  
Century 00008  
Cisco 01877, 00877, 01982  
Comcast 01982  
00476, 00810, 00276  
GoldStar 00144  
Hitachi 00008  
i3 Micro 01602  
Insight 00476, 00810  
Jerrold 00476, 00810,  
00276  
Macab 00817  
Memorex 00000  
Motorola 01376, 00476,  
00810, 00276, 01106  
Myrio 01602, 01822  
Noos 00817  
Nova Vision 00008  
Novaplex 00008  
Ono 01068  
Pace 01877, 00877, 00237,  
00008, 01060, 01068  
Penney 00000  
Philips 01305, 00317  
Pulsar 00000  
Quasar 00000  
RCA 01256  
Regal 00276  
Runco 00000  
Samsung 00144  
Scientific Atlanta 01877,  
00877, 00237, 00000,  
00008  
Sejin 01602  
Sony 01006  
Sprucer 00144  
Supercable 00276  
Thomson 01256  
Toshiba 00000  
Digeo 02187  
Director 00476  
Fosgate 00276  
GE 00144  
123  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Additional information  
Cisco 01877, 01982  
Motorola 01376, 00810,  
01106  
RCA 01256  
Cable/PVR  
Comcast 01982  
Scientific Atlanta 01877  
Sony 01006  
Supercable 00276  
Combination  
Pioneer 01877  
Amino 01822  
Myrio 01822  
Digeo 02187  
General Instrument 00810  
Jerrold 00810  
Pace 01877, 00237  
Panasonic 01982  
Thomson 01256  
Laser Disc Player  
Pioneer 30241, 32447  
Denon 30241  
Magnavox 30241  
Mitsubishi 30241  
Cassette Deck  
Pioneer 40027, 42446  
Aiwa 40029  
Harman/Kardon 40029  
JVC 40244  
Kenwood 40070  
Magnavox 40029  
Marantz 40029  
Onkyo 40135  
Sansui 40029  
Optimus 40027  
Sony 40243  
Philips 40029  
Polk Audio 40029  
RCA 40027  
Wards 40027  
Yamaha 40097  
Carver 40029  
Denon 40076  
Grundig 40029  
Digital Tape  
Pioneer 40019  
Onkyo 40019  
Video Accessory  
Pioneer 01010  
Hewlett Packard 01272  
Niveus Media 01272  
Tagar Systems 01272  
Toshiba 01272  
Howard Computers 01272 Northgate 01272  
2Wire 02045  
ABS 01272  
Accurian 01653  
ADB 02586  
Alienware 01272  
Amino 01481  
AT&T 02045  
HP 01272  
Touch 01272  
Panasonic 01120  
Philco 01563  
Ricavision 01272  
Samsung 01190, 01490  
Sharp 01010  
Sony 01272, 01324  
Stack 9 01272  
SureWest 01481  
Sylvania 01563  
Systemax 01272  
Hush 01272  
iBUYPOWER 01272  
Insignia 01415  
KoolConnect 01481  
LG 01415  
Linksys 01272  
Viewsonic 01272, 01329  
Voodoo 01272  
Xbox 02049  
Zenith 01415  
ZT Group 01272  
CyberPower 01272  
Epson 01563  
Magnavox 01563  
Media Center PC 01272  
Microsoft 02049, 01272  
Mind 01272  
Gateway 01272  
Motorola 01998, 01363  
124  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Specifications  
12  
Digital In/Out Section  
HDMI terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin (Not DVI)  
HDMI output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V, 100 mA  
USB terminal . . . . . USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A)  
iPod terminal. . . . . USB, and Video (Composite)  
SIRIUS antenna cable . . . . 8-pin mini DIN cable  
Amplifier section  
Continuous average power output of 90  
watts* per channel, min., at 8 ohms, from  
20 Hz to 20 000 Hz with no more than  
0.2 %** total harmonic distortion.  
Integrated control section  
Control (SR) terminal . . Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)  
Control (IR) terminal. . . Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)  
IR signal. . . . . . . . High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)  
Front (stereo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 W + 90 W  
Power output (1 kHz, 6 Ω, 0.05 %, 1 ch driven)  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 W per channel  
Guaranteed speaker impedance  
Miscellaneous  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Ω to 8 Ω,  
Power requirements. . . . . . . . . . AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 W  
In standby . . . . . . . 0.5 W (KURO LINK OFF)  
0.8 W (KURO LINK ON)  
less than 8 Ω to 6 Ω (setting required)  
* Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commission’s  
Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for  
Amplifiers  
Dimensions  
** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer  
. . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 158 mm (H) x 349 mm (D)  
(16 9/16 in. (W) x 6 1/4 in. (H) x 13 3/4 in. (D))  
Weight (without package) . . . . 8.7 kg (19 lb 3 oz)  
Audio Section  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 mV/47 kΩ  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
Furnished Parts Number  
MCACC Setup microphone (APM7008) . . . . . . 1  
Remote control unit (AXD7551(VSX-1019AH)/  
AXD7552 (VSX-919AH)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
AA/IEC R6 dry cell batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
iPod cable (ADE7129). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
FM wire antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
These operating instructions  
REC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 mV/2.2 kΩ  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
(IHF, short circuited, A network)  
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio [EIA, at 1 W (1 kHz)]  
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 dB  
Tuner Section  
Frequency Range (FM) . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz  
Antenna Input (FM) . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω unbalanced  
Frequency Range (AM) . . . . 530 kHz to 1700 kHz  
Antenna (AM). . . . . . . .Loop antenna (balanced)  
Note  
• Specifications and the design are subject  
to possible modifications without notice,  
due to improvements.  
Video Section  
Signal level  
Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
Component Video . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω),  
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
Corresponding maximum resolution  
Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . 1080p (1125p)  
(Video convert off)  
125  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Additional information  
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime  
Used wisely, your new sound equipment will  
provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since  
hearing damage from loud noise is often  
undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer  
and the Electronic Industries Association’s  
Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid  
prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of  
sound levels is included for your protection.  
Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit  
you’ve just purchased is only the start of your  
musical enjoyment. Now it’s time to consider how  
you can maximize the fun and excitement your  
equipment offers. This manufacturer and the  
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer  
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of  
your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that  
lets the sound come through loud and clear without  
annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly,  
without affecting your sensitive hearing.  
Decibel  
Level Example  
30 Quiet library, soft whispers  
40 Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic  
50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office  
60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine  
70 Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant  
80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock  
at two feet.  
Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing  
“comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound.  
So what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and  
harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by  
setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your  
hearing adapts.  
THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS  
UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE  
90 Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower  
100 Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill  
120 Rock band concert in front of speakers,  
thunderclap  
To establish a safe level:  
• Start your volume control at a low setting.  
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it  
comfortably and clearly, and without distortion.  
140 Gunshot blast, jet plane  
180 Rocket launching pad  
Once you have established a comfortable sound  
level:  
• Set the dial and leave it there.  
Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation.  
Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent  
hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we  
want you listening for a lifetime.  
S001_En  
Cleaning the unit  
®
This product includes FontAvenue fonts licenced by  
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe  
off dust and dirt.  
NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark  
of NEC Corporation  
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft  
cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser  
diluted five or six times with water, and  
wrung out well, and then wipe again with a  
dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or  
cleansers.  
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide  
sprays or other chemicals on or near this  
unit, since these will corrode the surface.  
126  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
LIMITEDWARRANTY  
WARRANTYVALIDONLYINCOUNTRYOFPRODUCTPURCHASE  
WARRANTY  
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc. (PUSA), and Pioneer Electronics Of Canada, Inc. (POC), warrant that products distributed by PUSA in the U.S.A., and by POC in Canada that fail to function  
properlyundernormaluseduetoamanufacturingdefectwheninstalledandoperatedaccordingtotheowner’smanualenclosedwiththeunitwillberepairedorreplacedwithaunitofcomparable  
value, at the option of PUSA or POC, without charge to you for parts or actual repair work. Parts supplied under this warranty may be new or rebuilt at the option of PUSA or POC.  
THISLIMITEDWARRANTYAPPLIESTOTHEORIGINALORANYSUBSEQUENTOWNEROFTHISPIONEERPRODUCTDURINGTHEWARRANTYPERIODPROVIDEDTHE  
PRODUCT WAS PURCHASED FROM AN AUTHORIZED PIONEER DISTRIBUTOR/DEALER IN THE U.S.A. OR CANADA. YOU WILL BE REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A SALES  
RECEIPT OR OTHER VALID PROOF OF PURCHASE SHOWING THE DATE OF ORIGINAL PURCHASE OR, IF RENTED, YOUR RENTAL CONTRACT SHOWING THE PLACE  
ANDDATEOFFIRSTRENTAL. INTHEEVENTSERVICEISREQUIRED,THEPRODUCTMUSTBEDELIVEREDWITHINTHEWARRANTYPERIOD,TRANSPORTATIONPREPAID,  
ONLY FROM WITHIN THE COUNTRY OF PURCHASE AS EXPLAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT. YOU WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF THE  
PRODUCT. PUSA OR POC, AS APPROPRIATE, WILL PAY TO RETURN THE REPAIRED OR REPLACEMENT PRODUCT TO YOU WITHIN THE COUNTRY OF PURCHASE.  
Parts  
Labor  
PRODUCTWARRANTYPERIOD  
1 Year  
90 Days  
1 Year  
90 Days  
Home Audio and Video  
.........................................................................................................................................................  
Microphones, Headphones, Phono Cartridges and Styluses ................................................................................................  
Shorter limited warranty periods apply to some models. Please refer to the limited warranty document enclosed with the product for a definitive statement of the warranty period.  
The warranty period for retail customers who rent the product commences upon the date product is first put into use (a) during the rental period or (b) retail sale, whichever occurs first.  
WHAT IS NOT COVERED  
IF THIS PRODUCT WAS PURCHASED FROM AN UNAUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR, THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY  
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND THIS PRODUCT IS SOLD STRICTLY “AS IS” AND “WITH ALL FAULTS".  
PIONEER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL AND/OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES.  
PIONEER DOES NOT WARRANT ANY PRODUCT LISTED ABOVE WHEN IT IS USED IN A TRADE OR BUSINESS OR IN ANY INDUSTRIAL OR COMMERCIAL APPLICATION.  
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY IF THE PRODUCT HAS BEEN SUBJECTED TO POWER IN EXCESS OF ITS PUBLISHED POWER RATING.  
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER TELEVISION OR DISPLAY SCREENS DAMAGED BY STATIC, NON-MOVING, IMAGES APPLIED FOR LENGTHY PERIODS (BURN-IN).  
ANY  
THISWARRANTYDOESNOTCOVERTHECABINETORANYAPPEARANCEITEM,USERATTACHEDANTENNA,ANYDAMAGETORECORDSORRECORDINGTAPESORDISCS,  
DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT RESULTING FROM ALTERATIONS, MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY PIONEER, ACCIDENT, MISUSE OR ABUSE, DAMAGE DUE TO  
LIGHTNINGORTOPOWERSURGES,SUBSEQUENTDAMAGEFROMLEAKING,DAMAGEFROMINOPERATIVEBATTERIES,ORTHEUSEOFBATTERIESNOTCONFORMINGTOTHOSE  
SPECIFIED IN THE OWNER’S MANUAL.  
THISWARRANTYDOESNOTCOVERTHECOSTOFPARTSORLABORWHICHWOULDBEOTHERWISEPROVIDEDWITHOUTCHARGEUNDERTHISWARRANTYOBTAINEDFROM  
ANYSOURCEOTHERTHANAPIONEERAUTHORIZEDSERVICECOMPANYOROTHERDESIGNATEDLOCATION. THISWARRANTYDOESNOTCOVERDEFECTSORDAMAGECAUSED  
BY THE USE OF UNAUTHORIZED PARTS OR LABOR OR FROM IMPROPER MAINTENANCE.  
ALTERED, DEFACED, OR REMOVED SERIAL NUMBERS VOID THIS ENTIRE WARRANTY  
NOOTHERWARRANTIES  
IN THE U.S.A.  
-
PIONEER LIMITS ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITYANDFITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSE,TOAPERIODNOTTOEXCEEDTHEWARRANTYPERIOD. NOWARRANTIESSHALLAPPLYAFTERTHE  
WARRANTYPERIOD. SOMESTATESDONOTALLOWLIMITATIONSONHOWLONGANIMPLIEDWARRANTYLASTSANDSOMESTATESDONOTALLOWTHEEXCLUSIONS  
ORLIMITATIONSOFINCIDENTALORCONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES, SOTHEABOVELIMITATIONSOREXCLUSIONSMAYNOTAPPLYTOYOU. THISWARRANTYGIVES  
YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.  
INCANADA-EXCEPTASEXPRESSLYPROVIDEDHEREIN,THEREARENOREPRESENTATIONS,WARRANTIES,OBLIGATIONSORCONDITIONS,IMPLIED,STATUTORY  
OR OTHERWISE, APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT.  
TO OBTAIN SERVICE  
PUSA and POC have appointed a number of Authorized Service Companies throughout the U.S.A. and Canada should your product require service. To receive warranty service  
you need to present your sales receipt or, if rented, your rental contract showing place and date of original owner’s transaction. If shipping the unit you will need to package  
it carefully and send it, transportation prepaid by a traceable, insured method, to an Authorized Service Company. Package the product using adequate padding material to  
prevent damage in transit. The original container is ideal for this purpose. Include your name, address and telephone number where you can be reached during business hours.  
On all complaints and concerns in the U.S.A. call Customer Support at 1-800-421-1404, or, in Canada, call Customer Satisfaction at 1-877-283-5901.  
INCANADA  
For additional information on this warranty,  
please call or write:  
INTHEU.S.A.  
For hook-up and operation of your unit or to locate an  
Authorized Service Company, please call or write:  
CUSTOMERSATISFACTIONGROUP  
PIONEERELECTRONICSOFCANADA,INC.  
300 ALLSTATE PARKWAY  
PIONEERELECTRONICSSERVICE,INC.  
P.O. BOX 1760  
LONG BEACH, CALIFORNIA 90801  
1-800-421-1404  
MARKHAM, ON L3R 0P2  
(905) 479-4411  
1-877-283-5901  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca  
DISPUTERESOLUTION  
IN THE U.S.A. - Following our response to any initial request to Customer Support, should a dispute arise between you and Pioneer, Pioneer makes available its Complaint  
Resolution Program to resolve the dispute. The Complaint Resolution Program is available to you without charge. You are required to use the Complaint Resolution Program  
before you exercise any rights under, or seek any remedies, created by Title I of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty-Federal Trade Commission Improvement Act, 15 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.  
To use the Complaint Resolution Program call 1-800-421-1404 and explain to the customer service representative the problem you are experiencing, steps you have taken  
to have the product repaired during the warranty period and the name of the authorized Distributor/Dealer from whom the Pioneer product was purchased. After the complaint  
has been explained to the representative, a resolution number will be issued. Within 40 days of receiving your complaint, Pioneer will investigate the dispute and will either:  
(1) respond to your complaint in writing informing you what action Pioneer will take, and in what time period, to resolve the dispute; or (2) respond to your complaint in writing  
informing you why it will not take any action.  
IN CANADA - Call the Customer Satisfaction Manager at (905) 946-7446 to discuss your complaint and to obtain a prompt resolution.  
RECORDTHEPLACEANDDATEOFPURCHASEFORFUTUREREFERENCE  
ModelNo. ____________________________________________ SerialNo. _________________________________________ PurchaseDate _______________________  
PurchasedFrom _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________  
KEEP THIS INFORMATION AND YOUR SALES RECEIPT IN A SAFE PLACE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Should this product require service in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nearest Pioneer  
Authorized Independent Service Company, or if you wish to purchase replacement parts,  
operating instructions, service manuals, or accessories, please call the number shown  
below.  
1 – 8 0 0 – 4 2 1 – 1 4 0 4  
Please do not ship your product to Pioneer without first calling the Customer Support at the  
above listed number for assistance.  
Pioneer Electronics Service, Inc.  
P.O. BOX 1760, Long Beach,  
CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.  
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.  
Should this product require service in Canada, please contact a Pioneer Canadian  
Authorized Dealer to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Service Company in Canada.  
Alternatively, please contact the Customer Satisfaction Department at the following address:  
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.  
Customer Satisfaction Department  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2  
1-877-283-5901  
905-479-4411  
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.  
Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous adresser à un distributeur autorisé  
Pioneer du Canada pour obtenir le nom du Centre de Service Autorisé Pioneer le plus près  
de chez-vous. Vous pouvez aussi contacter le Service à la clientèle de Pioneer:  
Pioneer Électroniques du Canada, Inc.  
Service Clientèle  
300, Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2  
1-877-283-5901  
905-479-4411  
Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez vous reporter au feuillet sur la  
garantie restreinte qui accompagne le produit.  
S018_C_EF  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2009 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270  
K002_B_En  
<XRB3109-A>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printed in  

Pelco Security Camera PS20 User Manual
Pentax Automobile Electronics K2 User Manual
Philips Blu ray Player BDP5005 F7 User Manual
Philips Computer Drive 9305 125 20047 User Manual
Philips CRT Television 170X4 User Manual
Philips DVD Recorder DVDR3425H User Manual
Philips Telephone 6326 User Manual
Pitco Frialator Fryer E14B User Manual
Power Acoustik GPS Receiver PAVN 7210 User Manual
PQI Computer Drive U172 User Manual